Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow

the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. User Guide First Edition GRAND CHEROKEE 18WK-926-AA DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. 2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDE Includes SRT®

2844814_18a_Grand_Cherokee_UG_ENG_051017.indd 1 5/10/17 2:36 PM This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

2844814_18a_Grand_Cherokee_UG_ENG_051017.indd 2 5/10/17 2:36 PM Congratulations on selecting your new FCA Please disregard any features and equipment for further information. For your convenience, LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents described in this guide that are not available the information contained on this site may precision workmanship, distinctive styling, on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the also be printed and saved for future refer- and high quality. right to make changes in design and specifi- ence. cations and/or make additions to or improve- ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the ments to its products without imposing any FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on obligation upon itself to install them on prod- environment and natural resources. By con- the steering wheel. You have full responsibility ucts previously manufactured. verting from paper to electronic delivery for and assume all risks related to the use of the the majority of the user information for your features and applications in this vehicle. Only This User Guide has been prepared to help vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de- use the features and applications when it is you quickly become acquainted with the mand for tree-based products and lessen the safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an important features of your vehicle. It contains stress on our environment. accident involving serious injury or death. most things you will need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including emergency When it comes to service, remember that your This guide illustrates and describes the op- information. authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle eration of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. For complete owner information, refer to best, has factory-trained technicians and ® This guide may also include a description of your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about your features and equipment that are no longer care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or satisfaction. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu- cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can Essential Information page. A few pages further there is a key for cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper- getting to know the chapter order and the ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli- Each time direction instructions (left/right or relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are a textual indication of the current chapter at fatal injury. Drive carefully. given, these must be intended as regarding the side of each even page. an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be Symbols properly specified in the text. Some vehicle components have colored la- The figures in this User Guide are provided by bels whose symbols indicate precautions to way of example only: this might imply that be observed when using this component. some details of the image do not correspond Rollover Warning Label to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Failure to use the driver and passenger seat In addition, the User Guide has been con- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher belts provided is a major cause of severe or ceived considering vehicles with steering rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a notes that the universal use of existing seat that on vehicles with steering wheel on the higher center of gravity than many passenger belts could cut the highway death toll by right side, the position or construction of vehicles. It is capable of performing better in 10,000 or more each year and could reduce some controls is not exactly mirror-like with a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven disabling injuries by two million annually. In respect to the figure. in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- of control. Because of the higher center of To identify the chapter with the information cantly more likely to die than a person wear- gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may needed you can consult the index at the end ing a seat belt. Always buckle up. of this User Guide. roll over while some other vehicles may not.

2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS MANUAL THIS USE TO HOW While reading this User Guide you will find a series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre- vent incorrect use of components which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol- lowed to prevent against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.

3 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX 6 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 8 INTERIOR...... 9

7 INSTRUMENT PANEL GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Instrument Panel 1 — Air Vents 5 — Ignition 2 — Paddle Shifter 6 — Steering Wheel 3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Headlight Switch 4 — Glove/Storage Compartment

8 INTERIOR

Interior Features 1 — Door Handle 5 — Radio 9 — Gear Selector 13 — Headlight Switch 2 — Air Vents 6 — Glove/Storage Compartment 10 — Ignition Switch 14 — Power Window/Door Lock 3 — Paddle Shifter 7 — Seats 11 — Electronic Speed Controls Switches 4 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls

9 10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE USER GUIDE — Irregular Operation ...... 22 STEERINGWHEEL...... 35 IFEQUIPPED...... 13 General Information ...... 22 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .35 KEYS...... 15 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .35 KeyFob...... 15 IFEQUIPPED...... 23 Heated Steering Wheel...... 36 IGNITIONSWITCH...... 17 To Arm The System ...... 23 MIRRORS ...... 36 To Disarm The System ...... 23 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...... 17 Folding Mirrors ...... 36 Vehicle On Message ...... 18 DOORS ...... 24 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 37 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . .24 EXTERIORLIGHTS...... 38 IFEQUIPPED...... 19 Locking The Doors With One Or More Headlight Switch ...... 38 Doors Open...... 27 How To Use Remote Start ...... 19 Headlights ...... 38 Auto Relocking ...... 27 Remote Start Abort Message ...... 20 Daytime Running Lights ...... 39 Child-Protection Door Lock System — High Beams ...... 39 To Enter Remote Start Mode ...... 20 Rear Doors ...... 28 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Flash-To-Pass ...... 39 Driving The Vehicle ...... 20 SEATS...... 28 Automatic Lighting ...... 39 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive Memory Seat...... 28 Parking Lights And Panel Lights .....40 The Vehicle...... 20 Heated/Ventilated Seats ...... 29 Headlight Delay ...... 40 Comfort Systems — If Equipped ...... 21 HEADRESTRAINTS...... 31 Fog Lights ...... 40 General Information ...... 21 Front Adjustment ...... 31 Turn Signals ...... 41 SENTRYKEY...... 21 Front Removal ...... 33 Lane Change Assist ...... 41 Customer Key Programming ...... 22 Rear Adjustment ...... 34 INTERIORLIGHTS...... 41 Replacement Keys ...... 22

11 WIPER/WASHER ...... 41 POWER SUNROOF ...... 56 Before You Begin Programming Front Wipers ...... 41 Opening...... 56 HomeLink ...... 62 Rain Sensor ...... 42 Closing ...... 56 Erasing All The HomeLink Channels....62 Rear Wiper ...... 42 Wind Buffeting ...... 56 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .....63 CLIMATECONTROLS...... 43 Anti-Pinch Safety Device ...... 57 Programming HomeLink To A Garage Automatic Climate Controls Overview . . .43 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF Door Opener ...... 63 Climate Control Functions...... 50 WITH POWER SHADE ...... 57 Programming HomeLink To A Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — Opening Power Shade ...... 58 Miscellaneous Device ...... 64 If Equipped ...... 51 HOOD ...... 58 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Operating Tips ...... 51 Opening...... 58 Button...... 64 WINDOWS...... 54 Closing ...... 58 General Information ...... 65 Power Window Controls ...... 54 LIFTGATE ...... 59 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 65 Auto-Down Feature ...... 54 Opening...... 59 Power Outlets ...... 65 Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ...... 54 Closing ...... 60 Power Inverter ...... 68 Reset Auto-Up ...... 55 Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...... 60

GETTING TO KNOW YOURWindow VEHICLE Lockout Switch ...... 55 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR Wind Buffeting ...... 55 OPENER(HOMELINK)...... 62

12 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF Pre-Installed Features EQUIPPED • Your User Guide • Available when — Updated in and where you Access your Owner’s Information – right real-time need it through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touch- • Touchscreen • Customizable screen radio — If Equipped convenience interface To access the Vehicle User Guide on your • Maintenance • Multilingual Uconnect Touchscreen: Push the Uconnect schedules and Apps button, then push the Vehicle User Guide information icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect reg- • Comprehensive istration is required. icon & symbol glossary NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion.

13 Vehicle User Guide Home Screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOURNOTE: VEHICLE Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, standing your vehicle. There’s no app to Uconnect screen images are for illustration you will be able to explore your warranty download, no phone to connect and no exter- purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- information and radio manual when and nal device needed for playback. Plus, it’s ware for your vehicle. where you need them. Your Uconnect radio updated throughout the year, in real-time, so will display the Vehicle User Guide on your it never goes out of date. touchscreen radio to assist in better under-

14 Features/Benefits KEYS • Pre-installed on your Uconnect touch- screen radio Key Fob • Enhanced search and browsing capability Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. • Robust NAV application — If Equipped The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/ • Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor- STOP push button ignition system. The Re- ites category mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob • Icon and symbol glossary and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped. • Warranty information Enhanced Search And Browsing Capability NOTE: • Crucial driver information and assistance: The key fob may not be found if it is located • Operating • Maintenance next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec- Instructions Schedules tronic device; these devices may block the • Warranty • Emergency key fob’s wireless signal. Information Procedures The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the • Fluid Level • 911 Contact and doors and liftgate from distances up to ap- Standards More proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future. NOTE: Icon And Symbol Glossary In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.

15 ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key Programming Additional Key Fobs fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key) Programming the key fob may be performed against the ENGINE START/STOP button and by your authorized dealer. push to operate the ignition switch. Request For Additional Key Fobs To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the unlock button on the NOTE: key fob once to unlock the driver's door or Only key fobs that are programmed to the twice within five seconds to unlock all doors vehicle electronics can be used to start and the liftgate. and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- All doors can be programmed to unlock on grammed to any other vehicle. the first push of the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ WARNING! Key Fob care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or • Always remove the key fobs from the 1 — Unlock www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) vehicle and lock all doors when leaving 2 — Liftgate for further information. the vehicle unattended. 3 — Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • Always remember to place the ignition in 4 — Remote Start To Lock The Doors And Liftgate the OFF mode. 5 — Panic Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists NOTE: If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle In case the ignition switch does not change is open, the doors will lock. The doors will electronics. A blank key fob is one that has with the push of a button, the key fob may unlock again automatically if the key is left never been programmed. have a low or dead battery. In this situation, inside the passenger compartment, other- a back up method can be used to operate the wise the doors will stay locked. 16 NOTE: NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you proved by the party responsible for compli- to an authorized dealer. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- ate the equipment. NOTE: Black keys (6.4L) must be replaced with IGNITION SWITCH black keys and Red Keys (6.2L) must be replaced with Red Keys. Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition General Information This feature allows the driver to operate the The following regulatory statement applies to ignition switch with the push of a button as all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in long as the key fob is in the passenger com- this vehicle: partment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four START/STOP Ignition Button This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC operating modes which are labeled and will Rules and with Industry Canada license- illuminate when in position. The three posi- The push button ignition can be placed in the exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- tions are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START. following modes: ject to the following two conditions: NOTE: OFF 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- If the ignition switch does not change with ference, and • The engine is stopped. the push of a button, the key fob may have a • Some electrical devices (e.g. Central lock- 2. This device must accept any interference low or dead battery. In this situation, a back ing, alarm, etc.) are still available. received, including interference that may up method can be used to operate the igni- cause undesired operation. tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite ACC of the emergency key) of the key fob against • Engine is not started. the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch. • Some electrical devices are available. 17 RUN ignition in the OFF position. In addition to WARNING! • Driving position. the chime, the message will display “Ignition • Do not leave children or animals inside Or Accessory On” in the cluster. • All the electrical devices are available. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior START heat build-up may cause serious injury NOTE: The power window switches and power sun- The engine will start. or death. • roof (if equipped) will remain active up to ten CAUTION! minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF WARNING! position. Opening either front door will can- • When exiting the vehicle, always remove An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for cel this feature. The time for this feature is the key fob from the vehicle and lock thieves. Always remove key fob from the programmable. your vehicle. vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, vehicle unattended. WARNING! or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- NOTE: • Before exiting a vehicle, always come to attended is dangerous for a number of Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting a complete stop, then shift the auto- reasons. A child or others could be seri- And Operating" on your Owner’s Manual at matic transmission into PARK, apply the ously or fatally injured. Children should www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key fob from GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE be warned not to touch the parking (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Canadian Residents) for further information. the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If • Do not leave the key fob in or near the equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, al- vehicle, or in a location accessible to Vehicle On Message ways make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from children, and do not leave the ignition When opening the driver's door when the the vehicle and lock the vehicle. of a vehicle equipped with Keyless ignition is in RUN (engine not running), a Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, chime will sound to remind you to place the child could operate power windows, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. other controls, or move the vehicle.

18 WARNING! REMOTE STARTING How ToUse Remote Start Push Remote Start button on the key fob • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • twice within five seconds. Pushing the Re- attended is dangerous for a number of mote Start button a third time shuts the reasons. A child or others could be seri- Push the remote start button on the key fob • engine off. ously or fatally injured. Children should twice within five seconds. Pushing the re- be warned not to touch the parking mote start button a third time shuts the • With remote start, the engine will only run brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. engine off. for 15 minutes (time out) unless the igni- • Do not leave the key fob in or near the tion is placed in the ON/RUN position. • With remote start, the engine will only run vehicle, or in a location accessible to for 15 minutes (time out) unless the igni- • The vehicle must be manually started with children, and do not leave the ignition tion is placed in the ON/RUN position. a push of the ignition START/STOP button of a vehicle equipped with Keyless The vehicle must be manually started with after two consecutive time outs. Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A • a push of the ignition START/STOP button All of the following conditions must be met child could operate power windows, after two consecutive time outs. other controls, or move the vehicle. before the engine will remote start: • Do not leave children or animals inside • Gear Selector in PARK parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior WARNING! • Doors closed heat build-up may cause serious injury • Do not start or run an engine in a closed or death. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas • Hood closed contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which • Liftgate closed is odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon- CAUTION! • Hazard switch off oxide is poisonous and can cause seri- An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for ous injury or death when inhaled. • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not thieves. Always remove key fob from the • Keep key fobs away from children. Op- pushed) vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the eration of the Remote Start System, • Battery at an acceptable charge level vehicle unattended. windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. • PANIC button not pushed

19 • System not disabled from previous remote • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low • For security, power window operation is start event • Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote • Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing Start mode. • Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open • Ignition in STOP/OFF position • The engine can be started two consecutive • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key • Fuel level meets minimum requirement Reset fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can WARNING! The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is turned to the repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. • Do not start or run an engine in a closed ON/RUN position. ToExit Remote Start Mode Without garage or confined area. Exhaust gas Driving The Vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which ToEnter Remote Start Mode is odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon- Push and release the Remote Start button on Push and release the Remote Start button oxide is poisonous and can cause seri- the key fob twice within five seconds. The one time or allow the remote start cycle to ous injury or death when inhaled. vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will complete the entire 15-minute cycle. • Keep key fobs away from children. Op- flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. eration of the Remote Start System, NOTE: Then the engine will start, and the vehicle windows, door locks or other controls To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the sys- will remain in the Remote Start mode for a could cause serious injury or death. tem will disable the one time push of the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15-minute cycle. Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. Remote Start Abort Message NOTE: ToExit Remote Start Mode And Drive The following messages will display in the • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is The Vehicle instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to low, the vehicle will start and then shut remote start or exits remote start prematurely: down in 10 seconds. Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and • Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open • The park lamps will turn on and remain on release the unlock button on the key fob to during Remote Start mode. unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using • Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the 20 door handles, and disarm the vehicle security NOTE: NOTE: alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of The Auto Comfort System can be activated Changes or modifications not expressly ap- the 15-minute cycle, push and release the and deactivated through the Uconnect sys- proved by the party responsible for compli- START/STOP button. tem. For more information on Comfort Sys- ance could void the user’s authority to oper- tem operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” ate the equipment. NOTE: in “Multimedia” on your Owner’s Manual at For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html SENTRY KEY N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents (Canadian Residents) for further information. will display in the instrument cluster display unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling until you push the ignition START button. General Information the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, Comfort Systems — If Equipped The following regulatory statement applies to regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in unlocked. When Remote Start is activated, Auto- this vehicle: Comfort will work anytime the temperature CAUTION! conditions are correct. When the feature is This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC enabled, regardless of Remote Start or regu- Rules and with Industry Canada license- The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not lar keyless start, the driver heated seat fea- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- compatible with some aftermarket remote tures will automatically turn on in cold ject to the following two conditions: starting systems. Use of these systems weather. In warm weather, the driver vented 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. seat feature will automatically turn on when ference, and the Remote Start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of Remote 2. This device must accept any interference All of the key fobs provided with your new Start or until the ignition is placed in the received, including interference that may vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle ON/RUN position. cause undesired operation. electronics.

21 Customer Key Programming When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- bulb check, it indicates that someone used tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Programming key fobs may be performed at to an authorized dealer. Either of these conditions will result in the your authorized dealer. engine being shut off after two seconds. Replacement Keys Irregular Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node NOTE: normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a Only key fobs that are programmed to the longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle vehicle electronics can be used to start there is a fault in the electronics. Should this operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- programmed to the vehicle can be used to possible by an authorized dealer. grammed to any other vehicle. start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key General Information fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. CAUTION! The following regulatory statement applies to The system will shut the engine off in two all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in • Always remove the key fobs from the seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start this vehicle: vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the engine. the vehicle unattended. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC NOTE: • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter- Rules and with Industry Canada license- GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE A key fob that has not been programmed is N-Go — Ignition, always remember to exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- also considered an invalid key. place the ignition in the OFF position. ject to the following two conditions: During normal operation, after placing the 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- NOTE: keyless ignition in the ON/RUN mode, the ference, and Duplication of key fobs may be performed at Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three an authorized dealer. This procedure consists seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains 2. This device must accept any interference of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle on after the bulb check, it indicates that received, including interference that may electronics. A blank key fob is one that has there is a problem with the electronics. In cause undesired operation. never been programmed. addition, if the light begins to flash after the 22 NOTE: ToArm The System • Push the lock button on the exterior Changes or modifications not expressly ap- Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid proved by the party responsible for compli- Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security key fob available in the same exterior ance could void the user’s authority to oper- alarm: zone. ate the equipment. 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed • Push the lock button on the key fob. in the “OFF” mode. 3. If any doors are open, close them. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, — IF EQUIPPED make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition ToDisarm The System system is OFF. The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve- The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless 2. Perform one of the following methods to using any of the following methods: Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op- lock the vehicle: • Push the unlock button on the key fob. eration. While the vehicle security alarm is • Push the lock button on the interior armed, interior switches for door locks and power door lock switch with the driver • Grasp the passive entry door handle to liftgate release are disabled. If something and/or passenger door open. unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm To Know Your Vehicle" in the Owner’s will provide the following audible and visible • Push the lock button on the exterior Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ signals: Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or key fob available in the same exterior www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- • The horn will pulse zone, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To dents) for further information. Know Your Vehicle" in the Owner’s • The turn signals will flash • Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ • The vehicle security light in the instrument disarm the system. owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) cluster will flash or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information.

23 NOTE: If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the • The key fob may not be able to be detected battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle by the vehicle passive entry system if it is • The driver's door key cylinder and the lift- security alarm will remain armed when the located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or gate button on the key fob cannot arm or battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will other electronic device; these devices may disarm the vehicle security alarm. flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, block the key fob’s wireless signal and • The vehicle security alarm remains armed disarm the vehicle security alarm. prevent the passive entry system from during power liftgate entry. Pushing the locking/unlocking the vehicle. liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle DOORS • Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated security alarm. If someone enters the ve- approach (Low Beams, License Plate hicle through the liftgate and opens any Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry Lamp, Position Lamps) for whichever time door, the alarm will sound. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement duration is set between 0, 30 (default), • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, to the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock the interior power door lock switches will Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This also initiates two flashes of the turn signal not unlock the doors. feature allows you to lock and unlock the lamps. vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having The vehicle security alarm is designed to to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has protect your vehicle. However, you can create been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry conditions where the system will give you a NOTE: door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be

GETTING TO KNOW YOURfalse VEHICLE alarm. If one of the previously described • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/ affected, resulting in a slower response arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in time. security alarm will arm regardless of whether “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle (Canadian Residents) for further informa- arm the security alarm. security alarm. tion.

24 To Unlock From The Driver Side To select between “Unlock Driver Door Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry 1st Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the To minimize the possibility of unintentionally “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at front driver door handle to unlock the driver's locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html door automatically. vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca with an automatic door unlock feature which (Canadian Residents) for further information. will function if the ignition switch is in the To Unlock From The Passenger Side OFF position. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab passive entry. There are five situations that the front passenger door handle to unlock all trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive four doors and the liftgate automatically. entry vehicle: NOTE: • A lock request is made by a valid Passive All doors will unlock when the front passen- Entry key fob while a door is open. ger door handle is grabbed regardless of • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry Grab The Door Handle To Unlock the driver’s door unlock preference setting door handle while a door is open. (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock • A lock request is made by the door panel All Doors 1st Press”). NOTE: switch while the door is open. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro- grammed all doors will unlock when you • When the vehicle security alarm is in pre- grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. arm or armed status and the liftgate transi- tions from open to closed. • When the liftgate transitions from opened to closed and remote start is active.

25 When any of these situations occur, after all To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer. front door handles, pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true: DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking • The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. NOTE: • Three attempts are made to lock the doors • After pushing the door handle button, you using the door panel switch and then close must wait two seconds before you can lock the doors. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive • There is a valid Passive Entry key fob out- Entry door handle. This is done to allow you GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE side the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a NOTE: to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling Passive Entry door handle. DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle without the vehicle react- the door handle lock button. This could un- ing and unlocking. lock the door(s).

26 • If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect NOTE: System, the key protection described in The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock "Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/ feature is built into the electronic liftgate functional. release. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if Locking The Doors With One Or More the key fob battery is dead. Doors Open The vehicle doors can also be locked by using If the door lock switch is pushed while the the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte- ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's rior door panel. door is open, the doors will not lock. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate Auto Relocking The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is The auto door lock feature default condition built into the electronic liftgate release. With Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft Passive Entry Location lock automatically when the vehicle's speed (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic 1 — Electronic Liftgate Release exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. 2 — Lock Button Location lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect To Lock The Liftgate Settings. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located on the outside liftgate door handle.

27 Child-Protection Door Lock System — a set of desired radio station presets. Your Rear Doors remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to recall the same positions To provide a safer environment for small chil- when the unlock button is pushed. dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. Child-Protection Door Lock Function

SEATS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Memory Seat Memory Seat Buttons This feature allows the driver to store up to NOTE: two different memory profiles for easy recall Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, through a memory switch. Each memory pro- one key fob can be linked to memory position file contains desired position settings for the 1 and the other key fob can be linked to driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and memory position 2. telescopic steering column (if equipped) and

28 The memory seat switch is located on the 4. Within five seconds, push and release You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen of three buttons: The instrument cluster display will show buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two • The set (S) button, which is used to activate which memory position has been set. indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one for the memory save function. LO and none for OFF. NOTE: • The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to • Press the heated seat button once to • Memory profiles can be set without the recall either of two pre-programmed memory turn the HI setting ON. vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in profiles. • Press the heated seat button a second PARK to recall a memory profile. time to turn the LO setting ON. Programming The Memory Feature • To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer • Press the heated seat button a third NOTE: to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote time to turn the heating elements OFF. To create a new memory profile, perform the Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” on your following: Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ If the HI-level setting is selected, the system care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) will automatically switch to LO-level after 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/ or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- approximately 60 minutes of continuous op- RUN position (Do not start the engine). dents) for further details. eration. At that time, the display will change 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to de- from HI to LO, indicating the change. The sired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, Heated/Ventilated Seats LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically power tilt and telescopic steering column after approximately 45 minutes. [if equipped], and radio station presets). Front Heated Seats NOTE: 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the The front heated seats control buttons are • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be memory switch. located within the climate or controls screen felt within two to five minutes. of the touchscreen. • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

29 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start NOTE: WARNING! • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be On models that are equipped with remote ting in a seat that has been overheated felt within two to five minutes. start, the heated seats can be programmed to could cause serious burns due to the come on during a remote start. increased surface temperature of the • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. This feature can be programmed through seat. the Uconnect system. Refer to your Own- If the HI-level setting is selected, the system er's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ Rear Heated Seats will automatically switch to LO-level after ap- proximately 60 minutes of continuous opera- owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or On some models, the two outboard seats are tion. At that time, the number of illuminated www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) equipped with heated seats. The heated seat LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the for further details. switches for these seats are located on the rear change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF of the center console. There are two heated automatically after approximately 45 minutes. WARNING! seat switches that allow the rear passen- gers to operate the seats independently. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to Front Ventilated Seats the skin because of advanced age, You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord settings. The indicator lights in each switch seats, the seat cushion and seat back will injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- indicate the level of heat in use. Two indica- have fans that draw the air from the passen-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE tion or other physical condition must tor lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO ger compartment and move air through fine exercise care when using the seat and none for OFF. perforations in the seat cover to help keep the heater. It may cause burns even at low • Push the heated seat button once to driver and front passenger cooler in higher temperatures, especially if used for long select HI-level heating. ambient temperatures. The fans operate at periods of time. two speeds, HI and LO. • Do not place anything on the seat or • Push the heated seat button a second seatback that insulates against heat, time to select LO-level heating. such as a blanket or cushion. This may • Push the heated seat button a third cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit- time to turn the heating elements OFF.

30 The front ventilated seats control buttons are HEAD RESTRAINTS Front Adjustment located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through Head restraints are designed to reduce the Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy- the climate screen or the controls screen. risk of injury by restricting head movement in able components, and vehicles with this the event of a rear impact. Head restraints equipment cannot be readily identified by • Press the ventilated seat button once to should be adjusted so that the top of the head any markings, only through visual inspection choose HI. restraint is located above the top of your ear. of the head restraint. The Active Head Re- • Press the ventilated seat button a sec- straints (AHR) will be split in two halves, with ond time to choose LO. WARNING! the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF. • All occupants, including the driver, When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the should not operate a vehicle or sit in a front half of the head restraint extends for- NOTE: vehicle’s seat until the head restraints ward to minimize the gap between the back The engine must be running for the ventilated are placed in their proper positions in of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This seats to operate. order to minimize the risk of neck injury system is designed to help prevent or reduce Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start in the event of a crash. the extent of injuries to the driver and front • Head restraints should never be ad- passenger in certain types of rear impacts. On models that are equipped with remote justed while the vehicle is in motion. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” start, the ventilated seats can be pro- Driving a vehicle with the head restraints in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at grammed to come on during a remote start. improperly adjusted or removed could www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html This feature can be programmed through cause serious injury or death in the event (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca the Uconnect system. Refer to your Own- of a collision. (Canadian Residents) for further information. er's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further details.

31 To raise the head restraint, pull upward on pull forward on the bottom of the head re- the head restraint. To lower the head re- straint. Push rearward on the bottom of the straint, push the adjustment button, located head restraint to move the head restraint at the base of the head restraint, and push away from your head. downward on the head restraint.

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) by qualified technicians, for service pur- Adjustment Button poses only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can • In the event of deployment of an Active Head be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- head restraint closer to the back of your head, tems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at

32 www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca WARNING! WARNING! stops. Failure to follow this warning (Canadian Residents) for further information. • All occupants, including the driver, could cause personal injury if the Active should not operate a vehicle or sit in a Head Restraint is deployed. WARNING! vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in • All occupants, including the driver, Front Removal order to minimize the risk of neck injury should not operate a vehicle or sit in a in the event of a collision. vehicle’s seat until the head restraints WARNING! • Do not place items over the top of the are placed in their proper positions in Active Head Restraint, such as coats, order to minimize the risk of neck injury ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- seat covers or portable DVD players. in the event of a collision. stalled in the vehicle to properly protect These items may interfere with the op- • Do not place items over the top of the the occupants. eration of the Active Head Restraint in Active Head Restraint, such as coats, the event of a collision and could result seat covers or portable DVD players. NOTE: in serious injury or death. These items may interfere with the op- • The head restraints should only be removed • Active Head Restraints may be deployed eration of the Active Head Restraint in by qualified technicians, for service pur- if they are struck by an object such as a the event of a collision and could result poses only. If either of the head restraints hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci- in serious injury or death. require removal, see your authorized dealer. dental deployment of the Active Head • Active Head Restraints may be deployed Restraint ensure that all cargo is se- if they are struck by an object such as a • In the event of deployment of an Active Head cured, as loose cargo could contact the hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci- Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- Active Head Restraint during sudden dental deployment of the Active Head tems” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at stops. Failure to follow this warning Restraint ensure that all cargo is se- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html could cause personal injury if the Active cured, as loose cargo could contact the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca Head Restraint is deployed. Active Head Restraint during sudden (Canadian Residents) for further information.

33 Rear Adjustment The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied, or removed for Child Seat WARNING! The head restraints on the outboard seats are Tethering. To remove the head restraint, raise not adjustable. They automatically fold for- • ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- it as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then, stalled in the vehicle to properly pro- ward when the rear seat is folded to a load push the release button at the base of the tect the occupants. Follow the re- floor position but do not return to their nor- post while pulling the head restraint upward. installation instructions above prior to mal position when the rear seat is raised. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head operating the vehicle or occupying a After returning either seat to its upright posi- restraint posts into the holes and push down- seat. tion, raise the head restraint until it locks in ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the • Sitting in a seat with the head restraint place. The outboard head restraints are not appropriate height. in its lowered position could result in removable. serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.

NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information.

Center Head Restraint Release Button Folded Rear Head Restraint

34 STEERING WHEEL To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steer- Manual Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column ing column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or This feature allows you to tilt the steering shorten the steering column, pull the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you wheel outward or push it inward as desired. to lengthen or shorten the steering column. To lock the steering column in position, push The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the lever upward until fully engaged. the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver Power Tilt/Telescoping Control to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious To tilt the steering column, move the lever up injury or death. or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or Power Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column push the lever away from you as desired. This feature allows you to tilt the steering WARNING! column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering col- Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column umn. The power tilt/telescoping steering col- while driving or driving with the steering Handle umn lever is located below the multifunction column unlocked, could cause the driver lever on the steering column.

35 NOTE: WARNING! The engine must be running for the heated WARNING! to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to steering wheel to operate. • Do not place anything on the steering follow this warning may result in serious wheel that insulates against heat, such injury or death. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start as a blanket or steering wheel covers of On models that are equipped with remote any type and material. This may cause Heated Steering Wheel start, the heated steering wheel can be pro- the steering wheel heater to overheat. grammed to come on during a remote start The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. through the Uconnect system. Refer to The heated steering wheel has only one tem- “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the MIRRORS Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ perature setting. Once the heated steering Folding Mirrors wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or average of 80 minutes or more before auto- www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada Residents) All outside mirrors are hinged and may be matically shutting off. This time may vary de- for further information. moved either forward or rearward to resist dam- pending on the temperature of the environ- age. The hinges have three detent positions: ment. The heated steering wheel can shut off WARNING! • Full forward position early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to • Full rearward position GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The heated steering wheel control button is the skin because of advanced age, • Normal position located within the Uconnect system. You can chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in- gain access to the control button through the jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- climate screen or the controls screen. tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering Press the heated steering wheel button • wheel heater. It may cause burns even once to turn the heating element on. at low temperatures, especially if used • Press the heated steering wheel button a for long periods. second time to turn the heating element off.

36 Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped • If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold when the ignition is turned If equipped with power folding mirrors, they ON. can be electrically folded rearward and un- folded into the drive position. • If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they will not automatically unfold. The switch for the power folding mirrors is For more information on power folding located between the power mirror switches L mirrors, refer to the Owner’s Manual at (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca second time and the mirrors will return to the (Canadian Residents). normal driving position. If the mirror is manually folded after electri- Heated Mirrors — If Equipped cally cycled, a potential extra button push is These mirrors are heated to melt required to get the mirrors back to the home Power Folding Mirror Switch frost or ice. This feature can be ac- position. If the mirror does not electrically tivated whenever you turn on the fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot Automatic Power Folding Mirrors rear window defroster. Refer to “Climate Con- area which can cause excessive drag. trols” in this chapter for further information. When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are locked).

37 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlights Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights, rotate the head- light switch clockwise. When the headlight The headlight switch is located on the left switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, side of the instrument panel, next to the license plate light and instrument panel steering wheel. The headlight switch controls lights are also turned on. To turn off the the operation of the headlights, parking headlights, rotate the headlight switch back lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights to the O (Off) position. and fog lights (if equipped). NOTE: • Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head- light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as Headlight Switch scratch resistant as glass and therefore 1 — Auto different lens cleaning procedures must be 2 — Rotate Headlight Switch followed. 3 — Push Fog Lights • To minimize the possibility of scratching GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4 — Rotate Dimmer the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

38 Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ cause the high beam headlights to turn on CAUTION! owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or until the lever is released. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) Do not use abrasive cleaning components, Automatic Lighting solvents, steel wool or other abrasive ma- for further information. terials to clean the lenses. SRT Vehicles The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control The Daytime Running Lights (bright inten- system provides increased forward lighting at Daytime Running Lights sity) come on whenever the engine is running, night by automating high beam control Non-SRT Vehicles and the transmission is not in the PARK through the use of a digital camera mounted position. The lights will remain on until the on the inside rearview mirror. This camera The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC posi- detects vehicle specific light and automati- come on whenever the engine is running, and tion or the parking brake is engaged. cally switches from high beams to low beams the transmission is not in the PARK position. The headlight switch must be used for normal until the approaching vehicle is out of view. The lights will remain on until the ignition is nighttime driving. switched to the OFF or ACC position or the NOTE: parking brake is engaged. High Beams • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con- NOTE: trol can be turned on or off by selecting Push the multifunction lever toward the in- • If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp “ON” under “Auto High Beam” within your strument panel to switch the headlights to on the same side of the vehicle will turn off Uconnect settings, as well as turning high beams. Pulling the multifunction back for the duration of the turn signal activa- the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- tion. Once the turn signal is no longer toward the steering wheel will turn the low tion. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. beams back on, or shut the high beams off. “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • The DRL function may be disabled through Flash-To-Pass (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect You can signal another vehicle with your (Canadian Residents) for further informa- Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s headlights by partially pulling the multifunc- tion. tion lever toward the steering wheel. This will

39 • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights Headlight Delay and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and with a headlight delay that will leave the other obstructions on the windshield or headlights on for approximately up to 90 sec- camera lens will cause the system to func- onds. This delay is initiated when the ignition tion improperly. is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Re- either turning the headlight switch on then duced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not off, or by turning the ignition ON. recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of NOTE: ignition ON. System will return to default This feature can be programmed through setting upon ignition off. the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Fog Light Operation Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mir- Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ ror must be re-aimed to ensure proper perfor- owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or The fog lights will operate only when the mance. See your local authorized dealer. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) parking lights are on or when the vehicle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE for further information. headlights are on low beam. An indicator Parking Lights And Panel Lights light located in the instrument cluster display Fog Lights will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is To turn on the parking lights and instrument pushed a second time, when the headlight panel lights, rotate the headlight switch The fog lights are turned on by rotating the switch is rotated to the off position, or the clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, headlight switch to the parking light or head- high beam is selected. rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) light position and pushing in the headlight position. rotary control.

40 TurnSignals side of the headlight switch) is rotated to its Front Wipers farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry and the The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo- Move the multifunction lever up or down and unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the cated on the multifunction lever on the left the arrows on each side of the instrument courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a side of the steering column. The front wipers cluster display flash to show proper operation door is open and the interior lights are on, are operated by rotating a switch, located on of the front and rear turn signal lights. rotating the dimmer control all the way down, the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper” in NOTE: to the last (off) detent, will cause all the this section. If either light remains on and does not flash, interior lights to go out. This is also known as or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a the “Party” mode because it allows the doors Wiper Operation defective outside light bulb. If an indicator to stay open for extended periods of time Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first fails to light when the lever is moved, it would without discharging the vehicle’s battery. four detent positions for intermittent set- suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. WIPER/WASHER tings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation Lane Change Assist and the sixth detent for high wiper operation. The multifunction lever is located on the left Tap the lever up or down once, without mov- side of the steering column. CAUTION! ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then Always remove any buildup of snow that automatically turn off. prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position. If the wind- INTERIOR LIGHTS shield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the park position, Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when damage to the wiper motor may occur. the front doors are opened or when the Multifunction Lever dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right

41 Rain Sensor • The Rain Sensing feature may not function • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When properly when ice, or dried salt water is the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans- This feature senses moisture on the wind- present on the windshield. mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the shield and automatically activates the wipers • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or Rain Sensing system will not operate until for the driver. The feature is especially useful silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor- the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is for road splash or overspray from the wind- mance. greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on the end of the multifunction lever to one of position. four settings to activate this feature. and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles Automatic Wiping the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- Sensing wipers are not operational when the The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po- Residents) for further information. operator is in the vehicle and has placed the sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper ignition switch in the RUN position, rain delay position four is the most sensitive. The Rain Sensing system has protection fea- sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will Setting three should be used for normal rain been selected, and no other inhibit condi- not operate under the following conditions: conditions. Settings one and two can be used tions (mentioned previously) exist. if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. • Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni- GETTING TO KNOW YOURSetting VEHICLE four can be used if the driver desires tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing Rear Wiper more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the system will not operate until the wiper The rear wiper/washer controls are located on OFF position when not using the system. switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater the multifunction lever on the left side of the than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- NOTE: steering column. The rear wiper/washer is perature is greater than 32°F (0°C). operated by rotating a switch, located at the • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate middle of the lever. when the wiper switch is in the low or high- speed position.

42 Wiper Operation Once the switch is released it will return to CLIMATE CONTROLS the OFF position and the wipers will cycle Rotate the center portion of the lever upward several times before returning to the parked Automatic Climate Controls Overview to the first detent for intermittent operation position. and to the second detent for continuous rear The Climate Control System allows you to wiper operation. NOTE: regulate the temperature, air flow, and direc- As a protective measure, the pump will stop if tion of air circulating throughout the vehicle. Rotating the center portion upward once the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. The controls are located on the instrument more will activate the washer pump which Once the switch is released the pump will panel below the radio. will continue to operate as long as the switch resume normal operation. is held. Upon release of the switch, the wip- ers will resume the continuous rear wiper If the rear wiper is operating when the igni- operation. When this rotary control is in the tion is turned OFF, the wiper will automati- OFF position, rotating it downward will acti- cally return to the “park” position. vate the rear washer pump which will con- tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.

43 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

44 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

45 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Controls On The Faceplate

46 Control Descriptions Icon Description

MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be dese- lected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The A/C can be dese- lected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this func- tion will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. Front Defrost Button The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.

47 Icon Description Rear Defrost Button The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.

Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch- screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set- ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

Faceplate Knob GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch- screen. • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. Touchscreen Buttons The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

48 Icon Description Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con- ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button This button turns the Climate Control System off.

49 the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode posi- CAUTION! the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning tion can be adjusted to desired user settings. Failure to follow these cautions can cause and manually adjust the blower and airflow Pressing other settings will cause the MAX damage to the heating elements: mode settings. Also, make sure to select only A/C operation to switch to the selected set- • Use care when washing the inside of Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. ting and MAX A/C to exit. the rear window. Do not use abrasive NOTE: Recirculation window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or When outside air contains smoke, odors, or mild washing solution, wiping parallel side glass, select Defrost mode, and in- high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, to the heating elements. Labels can crease blower speed if needed. you may wish to recirculate interior air by be peeled off after soaking with warm pressing the Recirculation control button. • If your air conditioning performance seems water. The Recirculation indicator will illuminate lower than expected, check the front of the • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- when this button is selected. Press the but- A/C condenser (located in front of the ra- ments, or abrasive window cleaners on ton a second time to turn off the Recircula- diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in- the interior surface of the window. tion mode and allow outside air into the sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from • Keep all objects a safe distance from vehicle. the front of the radiator and through the the window. condenser. NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode GETTING TO KNOW YOURClimate VEHICLE Control Functions MAX A/C may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable A/C (Air Conditioning) MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool- ing performance. (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the conditions exist that could create fogging on operator to manually activate or deactivate Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C the inside of the windshield. the air conditioning system. When the air and the prior settings. The button illuminates conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu- when MAX A/C is on. midified air will flow through the outlets into

50 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — NOTE: Operating Tips If Equipped • It is not necessary to move the temperature NOTE: settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system Automatic Operation Refer to the chart at the end of this section automatically adjusts the temperature, for suggested control settings for various 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort weather conditions. or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on as quickly as possible. the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. Summer Operation Panel. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric The engine cooling system must be protected 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would customer-programmable feature. Refer to with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro- like the system to maintain by adjusting the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” vide proper corrosion protection and to pro- the driver and passenger temperature in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant control buttons. Once the desired tem- en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. perature is displayed, the system will dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian achieve and automatically maintain that Residents) for further information. Winter Operation comfort level. To provide you with maximum comfort in the To ensure the best possible heater and de- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the froster performance, make sure the engine level, it is not necessary to change the blower fan will remain on low until the engine cooling system is functioning properly and settings. You will experience the greatest warms up. The blower will increase in speed the proper amount, type, and concentration efficiency by simply allowing the system and transition into Auto mode. of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula- to function automatically. tion mode during Winter months is not rec- Manual Operation Override ommended, because it may cause window This system offers a full complement of fogging. manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

51 Vacation/Storage Outside Air Intake Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Make sure the air intake, located directly in service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- run the air conditioning system at idle for tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the about five minutes, in fresh air with the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they blower setting on high. This will ensure ad- enter the plenum, they could plug the water equate system lubrication to minimize the drains. In winter months, make sure the air possibility of compressor damage when the intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. system is started again. Cabin Air Filter Window Fogging The climate control system filters out dust Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in and pollen from the air. Contact an autho- mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear rized dealer to service your cabin air filter, the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and and to have it replaced when needed. increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

52 Operating Tips Chart

53 WINDOWS There are single window controls on each switch down, for a short period of time, and passenger door trim panel, which operate the release and the window will go down auto- Power Window Controls passenger door windows. The window con- matically. trols will operate only when the ignition is in The window controls on the driver's door the ACC or ON/RUN position. To open the window part way, push the win- control all the door windows. dow switch down briefly and release it when WARNING! you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way Never leave children unattended in a ve- down during the Auto-Down operation, pull hicle, and do not let children play with up on the switch briefly. power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces- Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch sible to children, and do not leave the Protection ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. NOTE: Occupants, particularly unattended chil- dren, can become entrapped by the win- • If the window runs into any obstacle during dows while operating the power window auto-closure, it will reverse direction and switches. Such entrapment may result in then go back down. Remove the obstacle GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE serious injury or death. and use the window switch again to close the window. Power Window Switches Auto-Down Feature • Any impact due to rough road conditions 1 — Front Power Window Switches may trigger the auto-reverse function unex- The driver door power window switch and the 2 — Rear Power Window Switches pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap- passenger door power window switches have pens, pull the switch lightly and hold to an Auto-Down feature. Push the window close the window manually.

54 WARNING! Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting The window lockout switch on the driver's Wind buffeting can be described as the There is no anti-pinch protection when the door trim panel allows you to disable the perception of pressure on the ears or a window is almost closed. To avoid personal window controls on the rear passenger doors. helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, To disable the window controls, push and hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the fingers and all objects from the window release the window lockout button (the indi- windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in path before closing. cator light on the button with turn on). To certain open or partially open positions. This enable the window controls, push and release is a normal occurrence and can be mini- Reset Auto-Up the window lockout button again (the indica- mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear tor light on the button will turn back off). windows open, open the front and rear win- Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the dows together to minimize the buffeting. window probably needs to be reset. To reset If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, Auto-Up: adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the 1. Pull the window switch up to close the buffeting or open any window. window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two sec- onds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

Power Window Lockout Button

55 POWER SUNROOF Opening Closing The power sunroof switch is located on the Express Open Express Closing overhead console. Push the switch rearward and release it Push the switch forward and release it within within one-half second. The sunroof will fully one-half second. The sunroof will fully close open and stop automatically. automatically from any position. Manual Open Manual Closing Push and hold the switch rearward to open Push and hold the switch forward to close the the sunroof. Any release of the switch will sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop stop the movement, and the sunroof will the movement, and the sunroof will remain in remain in a partially open position until the a partially closed position until the switch is switch is pushed again. pushed again. Venting Sunroof Wind Buffeting Push and release the button and the sunroof Wind buffeting can be described as a will open to the vent position. helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet- This is called “Express Vent” and will occur ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjust GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Sunroof Switch regardless of sunroof position. During Ex- the front and rear windows together. 1 — Opening Sunroof press Vent operation, any movement of the If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, 2 — Venting Sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any 3 — Closing Sunroof window. This will minimize buffeting.

56 Anti-Pinch Safety Device WARNING! COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF This feature will detect an obstruction in the of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- WITH POWER SHADE opening of the sunroof during Express Close N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu- The CommandView sunroof with power shade operation. If an obstruction in the path of the pants, particularly unattended children, switch is located on the overhead console. sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto- can become entrapped by the power sun- matically retract. Remove the obstruction if roof while operating the power sunroof this occurs. Next, push the switch forward switch. Such entrapment may result in and release to Express Close. serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of NOTE: being thrown from a vehicle with an If three consecutive sunroof close attempts open sunroof. You could also be severely result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth injured or killed. Always fasten your seat close attempt will be a Manual Close move- belt properly and make sure all passen- ment with Pinch Protect disabled. gers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate WARNING! the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project • Do not let children play with the sunroof. through the sunroof opening. Injury may Never leave children unattended in a ve- result. Commandview Sunroof Switches hicle, or with access to an unlocked ve- hicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near 1 — Opening Sunroof the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition 2 — Venting Sunroof 3 — Closing Sunroof 4 — Opening Shade 5 — Closing Shade

57 Opening Power Shade HOOD WARNING! Express Open Opening Be sure the hood is fully latched before Push the shade switch rearward and release it driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully within one-half second and the shade will latched, it could open when the vehicle is automatically open to the halfway position in motion and block your vision. Failure to and stop automatically. follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. Push the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automati- Closing cally open to the full open position and stop automatically. 1. Before closing the hood, check to make sure all filler caps are correctly installed. Manual Open 2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to To open the shade, push and hold the switch close the hood and securely latch it into rearward. The shade will open and stop auto- place. matically at the half-open position. WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOURPush VEHICLE and hold the shade switch rearward Hood Release Lever again and the shade will open automatically Be sure the hood is fully latched before to the full-open position. 1. Pull the hood release lever located below driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully the steering wheel at the base of the NOTE: latched, it could open when the vehicle is instrument panel. Any release of the switch will stop the move- in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious ment and the shade will remain in a partially 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center injury or death. opened condition until the switch is pushed of the hood and move the safety latch lever and held rearward again. while lifting the hood at the same time.

58 The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is CAUTION! built into the electronic liftgate release. With To prevent possible damage, do not slam a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft the hood to close it. Use a firm downward (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic push at the front center of the hood to liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. ensure that both latches engage. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate. LIFTGATE NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro- Opening grammed in the instrument cluster display, all doors will unlock when you push the elec- The liftgate can be opened from inside the vehicle using the power liftgate button on the tronic release on the liftgate. If "Unlock overhead console, using the key fob outside Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in of the vehicle or the electronic liftgate re- Uconnect, only the liftgate will unlock Passive Entry/Lock Button Location when you push the electronic release on the lease. 1 — Electronic 2 — Lock Button liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Liftgate Release Location To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at The liftgate may be released in several ways: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Key fob (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca NOTE: (Canadian Residents) for further information. Use the power door lock switch on either front • Outside handle door trim panel or the key fob to lock and • Button on overhead console unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.

59 www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) WARNING! for further information) or by pushing the Driving with the liftgate open can allow liftgate button on the key fob. Push the lift- poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. gate button on the key fob twice within five You and your passengers could be injured seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed liftgate is open, pushing the button twice when you are operating the vehicle. within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate. Closing The power liftgate may also be opened or Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate closed by pushing the liftgate button located lowering the liftgate. Release the handle on the front overhead console. If the liftgate when the liftgate takes over the closing effort. is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left To Lock The Liftgate Rear Power Liftgate Switch rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless NOTE: button located on the left rear trim panel will Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo- The liftgate unlock feature is built into the reverse the liftgate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE electronic liftgate release. cated to the right of the outside handle re- When the liftgate button on the key fob is lease will lock the vehicle. Power Liftgate — If Equipped pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing The power liftgate may be closed by pushing The power liftgate may be opened by pushing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the the button, located in the upper left trim in the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Key- Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" close the liftgate. This button cannot be used in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in your in "Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at to open the liftgate. Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or 60 www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html NOTE: • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the lift- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca • The power liftgate buttons will not operate gate will reverse to the full open position. (Canadian Residents) for further information. if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed NOTE: is above 0 MPH (0 km/h). •If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the lift- • The power liftgate will not operate in tem- • In the event of a power malfunction to the gate motor will disengage to allow manual peratures below −22°F (−30°C) or tem- liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release operation. can be used to open the liftgate. The emer- peratures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to gency liftgate latch release can be ac- remove any buildup of snow or ice from the • If the power liftgate encounters multiple cessed through a snap-in cover located on liftgate before pushing any of the power obstructions within the same cycle, the the liftgate trim panel. liftgate switches. system will automatically stop and the lift- gate must be opened or closed manually. • If liftgate is left open for an extended period • If anything obstructs the power liftgate of time, the liftgate may need to be closed while it is closing or opening, the liftgate manually to reset power liftgate functionality. will automatically reverse to the closed or WARNING! open position, provided it meets sufficient • Driving with the liftgate open can allow resistance. WARNING! poisonous exhaust gases into your ve- • There are also pinch sensors attached to hicle. You and your passengers could be During power operation, personal injury or the side of the liftgate. Light pressure any- injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate cargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift- where along these strips will cause the closed when you are operating the ve- gate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate to return to the open position. hicle. liftgate is closed and latched before driv- • If the liftgate is not fully open, push the • If you are required to drive with the ing away. liftgate button on the key fob twice to liftgate open, make sure that all win- operate the liftgate. dows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

61 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR • The HomeLink buttons that are located in It is recommended that you erase all the the overhead console or sunvisor designate channels of your HomeLink before you use it OPENER (HOMELINK) the three different HomeLink channels. for the first time. • To operate HomeLink, push and release any If you have any problems, or require assis- of the programmed HomeLink buttons. tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 These buttons will activate the devices they or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in- are programmed to with each press of the formation or assistance. corresponding HomeLink button. • The HomeLink indicator light is located Erasing All The HomeLink Channels above the center button. To erase the channels, follow this procedure: Before YouBegin Programming HomeLink 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN For efficient programming and accurate position. transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink is recommended that a new battery be placed buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or in the hand-held transmitter of the device until the HomeLink indicator light flashes. that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. Make sure your hand-held trans- NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light mitter is programmed to activate the device Erasing all channels should only be per- • HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held you are trying to program your HomeLink formed when programming HomeLink for the transmitters that operate devices such as button to. first time. Do not erase channels when pro- garage door openers, motorized gates, Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of gramming additional buttons. lighting or home security systems. The the garage before you begin programming. HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

62 Identifying Whether YouHave A Rolling Programming HomeLink ToA Garage HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device Door Opener and then rapidly. Once this happens, re- lease both buttons. Before programming a device to one of To program any of the HomeLink buttons to your HomeLink buttons, you must determine activate your garage door opener motor, fol- NOTE: whether the device has a rolling code or low the steps below: Make sure the garage door opener motor is non-rolling code. plugged in before moving on to the rolling NOTE: code/non-rolling code final steps. Rolling Code Devices All HomeLink buttons are programmed using To determine if your device has a rolling this procedure. You do not need to erase Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps code, a good indicator is its manufacturing all channels when programming additional NOTE: buttons. date. Typically, devices manufactured after You have 30 seconds in which to initiate 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or position. rolling code final step 1. “TRAIN” button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the be immediately visible when looking at the 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” device. The name and color of the button may HomeLink button you wish to program, button. This can usually be found where the vary slightly by manufacturer. while keeping the HomeLink indicator hanging antenna wire is attached to the light in view. garage door opener motor. Firmly push and NOTE: release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you button you normally use to operate the device. want to program while you push and hold 2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro- the garage door opener transmitter button grammed HomeLink button three times Non-rolling Code Devices you are trying to replicate. (holding the button for two seconds each Most devices manufactured before 1995 will 4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob- time). If the garage door opener motor not have a rolling code. These devices will serve the HomeLink indicator light. The operates, programming is complete. also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

63 3. Push the programmed HomeLink button Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are to confirm that the garage door opener WARNING! designed to time-out in the same manner. motor operates. If the garage door opener ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from The procedure may need to be preformed motor does not operate, repeat the final your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide multiple times to successfully pair the device steps for the rolling code procedure. (CO) which is odorless and colorless. to your HomeLink buttons. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in- Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final haled and can cause you and others to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Steps be severely injured or killed. Button 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the HomeLink indicator Programming HomeLink ToA To reprogram a single HomeLink button that light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays Miscellaneous Device has been previously trained, without erasing on constantly, programming is complete. all the channels, follow the procedure below. Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga- Be sure to determine whether the new device 2. Push the programmed HomeLink button rage Door Opener” for the procedure on how you want to program the HomeLink button to to confirm that the garage door opener to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous motor operates. If the garage door opener has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code. device, as it follows the same procedure. Be motor does not operate, repeat the steps 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi- sure to determine if the device has a rolling from the beginning. tion, without starting the engine. code, or non-rolling code before beginning 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the programming process. WARNING! ton until the HomeLink Indicator light NOTE: • Your motorized door or gate will open begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- and close while you are programming release the button. mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev- the universal transceiver. Do not pro- eral seconds of transmission, which may not 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with gram the transceiver if people or pets are Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A in the path of the door or gate. be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Garage Door Opener” and follow all re- • Do not run your vehicle in a closed maining steps. garage or confined area while program-

64 General Information INTERNAL EQUIPMENT A second front power outlet is located inside the center console. The following regulatory statement applies to Power Outlets all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: There are three 12 Volt electrical power out- lets on this vehicle. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license- The front power outlet is located inside the exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- center storage bin of the instrument panel. ject to the following two conditions: Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- outlet. ference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- Center Console Power Outlet proved by the party responsible for compli- The rear power outlet is located in the right ance could void the user’s authority to oper- rear cargo area. ate the equipment.

Front Power Outlet

65 The power outlets are labeled with either a • Power outlets are designed for accessory “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled the power outlet as this will damage the with a “key” are powered when the ignition outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position, the power outlet can cause damage not while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are covered by your new vehicle warranty. connected directly to the battery and pow- • The rear cargo power outlet can be ered at all times. switched to “battery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet right rear NOTE: quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel. • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex- ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

66 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console 3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

67 Power Inverter NOTE: The power inverter is designed with built-in There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter overload protection. If the power rating of outlet located on the back of the center 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter console. This outlet can power cellular will automatically shut down. Once the elec- phones, electronics and other low power de- trical device has been removed from the vices requiring power up to 150 Watts. outlet, the inverter should automatically re- set. If the power rating exceeds approxi- mately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the in- verter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death, DO NOT: Power Inverter • insert any objects into the receptacles GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • touch with wet hands 1 — USB Ports (Charging Only) 2 — Rear Seat Heater Switches Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet 3 — Power Inverter Outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY...... 70 SYSTEM—OBDII...... 82 Instrument Cluster Display Location Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) And Controls ...... 70 Cybersecurity ...... 83 TRIP COMPUTER ...... 73 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND WARNING LIGHTS AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....83 MESSAGES...... 73 Red Warning Lights...... 73 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 76 Yellow Indicator Lights ...... 80 Green Indicator Lights ...... 80 White Indicator Lights ...... 81 Blue Indicator Lights ...... 82

69 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Instrument Cluster Display Location And 1. The top line where reconfigurable telltales, DISPLAY Controls compass direction, outside temperature, Time, Range MPG or Trip are displayed. The instrument cluster display is located in Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru- This also displays the speedometer when the center of the instrument cluster. ment cluster display, which offers useful in- other menu pages are displayed. formation to the driver. With the ignition in 2. The main display area where the menus the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a and pop up messages are displayed. door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the 3. The lower line where reconfigurable tell- odometer. Your instrument cluster display is tales, menu name and menu page are designed to display important information displayed. about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument clus- ter display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections Instrument Cluster Display and adjustments. 1 — Speedometer Display 2 — Main Display 3 — Menu Name And Menu Page Instrument Cluster Display Controls GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

70 • Push the up arrow button to scroll upward Oil Change Reset 2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle through the main menus (Speedometer, Info" in the instrument cluster display. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver change indicator system. The “Oil Change 3. Push and hold the OK button until the Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/ Required” message will display in the instru- gauge resets to 100%. Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages, ment cluster display for five seconds after a Screen Setup and Speed Warning). Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset single chime has sounded, to indicate the Procedure • Push the down arrow button to scroll down- next scheduled oil change interval. The en- ward through the main menu and sub- gine oil change indicator system is duty cycle 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push menus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, Vehicle based, which means the engine oil change and release the ENGINE START/STOP Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your button and place the ignition to the ON/ Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Naviga- personal driving style. RUN position (do not start the engine). tion, Stored Messages, Screen Setup and Speed Warning). Unless reset, this message will continue to 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, display each time you cycle the ignition to the three times within ten seconds. • Push the right arrow button to access the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push information screens or submenu screens of temporarily, push and release the OK button. a main menu item. To reset the oil change indicator system (after and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the • Push the left arrow button to access the performing the scheduled maintenance), re- OFF/LOCK position. information screens or submenu screens of fer to the following procedure. a main menu item. Oil Life Reset NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when • Push the OK button to access/select the 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator information screens or submenu screens of and release the ENGINE START/STOP a main menu item. Push and hold the OK button and place the ignition to the ON/ system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this button for two seconds to reset displayed/ RUN position (do not start the engine). procedure. selected features that can be reset.

71 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items Uconnect SRT Performance Features The instrument cluster display can be used to view the following main menu items: WARNING! Measurement of vehicle statistics with the NOTE: Performance Features is intended for off- Depending on the vehicles options, feature highway or off-road use only and should settings may vary. not be done on any public roadways. It is • Speedometer • Trip recommended that these features be used • MPH to km/h • Audio in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the • Vehicle Info • Stored Messages vehicle as measured by the performance SRT Performance Features Controls • Driver Assist • Screen Setup pages must never be exploited in a reck- • Fuel Economy • To access, press and release either the up or less or dangerous manner, which can jeop- ardize the user’s safety or the safety of NOTE: down arrow button until “SRT” appears in others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful Refer to your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ the instrument cluster display, then press and release the right arrow button to cycle driver can prevent accidents. en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) through the features. Press the OK button to or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) select a feature. • To access the SRT Performance Features, for further information. press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen •0-60MPH • Current G-Force SRT Performance Features (0-100 km/h) then press the “Performance Pages” button on the touchscreen. Instrument Cluster Display Performance • 0-100 MPH • Peak G-Force (0-161 km/h) • The Performance Page includes the follow- Features • 1/8 Mile Timer • Lap Timer ing menus: The instrument cluster display can be used to • 1/4 Mile Timer • Lap History • Home • Gauges 2 • Timers • G – Force GETTING TO KNOW YOURprogram INSTRUMENT PANEL the following Performance Features. • 60 ft Timer • Top Speed • Gauges 1 • Engine • Braking Distance

72 TRIP COMPUTER — Brake Warning Light either half of the dual brake system is indi- cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will This light monitors various brake functions, Push and release the up or down arrow button turn on when the brake fluid level in the until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in including brake fluid level and parking brake master cylinder has dropped below a speci- the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or application. If the brake light turns on it may fied level. right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and indicate that the parking brake is applied, release the OK button to display the Trip that the brake fluid level is low, or that there The light will remain on until the cause is information. is a problem with the anti-lock brake system corrected. reservoir. NOTE: WARNING LIGHTS AND The light may flash momentarily during sharp MESSAGES If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service level is at the full mark on the master cylinder Red Warning Lights performed, and the brake fluid level checked. reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy- — Air Bag Warning Light draulic system malfunction or that a problem If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair This light will turn on for four to eight seconds with the Brake Booster has been detected by is necessary. as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec- the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. If the tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this WARNING! light is either not on during startup, stays on, case, the light will remain on until the condi- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light or turns on while driving, have the system tion has been corrected. If the problem is on is dangerous. Part of the brake system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as related to the brake booster, the ABS pump may have failed. It will take longer to stop possible. This light will illuminate with a will run when applying the brake, and a brake the vehicle. You could have a collision. single chime when a fault with the Air Bag pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes The dual brake system provides a reserve on intermittently or remains on while driving, braking capacity in the event of a failure to a have an authorized dealer service the vehicle portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in immediately. 73 Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake — Battery Charge Warning Light Operating” in the Owner’s Manual at https:// System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html This light illuminates when the battery is not tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca charging properly. If it stays on while the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning (Canadian Residents) for further information. engine is running, there may be a malfunc- Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. tion with the charging system. Contact your Immediate repair to the ABS system is re- authorized dealer as soon as possible. WARNING! quired. This indicates a possible problem with the Continued operation with reduced assist Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be electrical system or a related component. could pose a safety risk to yourself and checked by turning the ignition switch from others. Service should be obtained as soon the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. — Door Open Warning Light as possible. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off This indicator will illuminate when a door is unless the parking brake is applied or a brake ajar/open and not fully closed. — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) fault is detected. If the light does not illumi- NOTE: Warning Light nate, have the light inspected by your autho- If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a This light informs you of a problem with the rized dealer. single chime. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a The light also will turn on when the parking — Electric Power Steering Fail problem is detected while the vehicle is run- ning, the light will either stay on or flash brake is applied with the ignition switch in Warning Light the ON/RUN position. depending on the nature of the problem. This light will turn on when there's a fault Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely NOTE: with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) and completely stopped and the transmission This light shows only that the parking brake is is placed in the PARK position. The light This light will turn on when there's a fault applied. It does not show the degree of brake should turn off. If the light remains on with with the EPS (Electric Power Steering). application. the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

74 If the light continues to flash when the ve- mal, turn the engine off immediately and call Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is hicle is running, immediate service is re- for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over- corrected. This light does not indicate how quired and you may experience reduced per- heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine information. must be checked under the hood. stall and your vehicle may require towing. The — Hood Open Warning Light — Oil Temperature Warning Light light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and This indicator will illuminate when the hood This telltale indicates engine oil temperature remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light is ajar/open and not fully closed. is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as does not come on during starting, have the NOTE: soon as possible. system checked by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a — Engine Temperature Warning Light single chime. — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition is first placed in the ON/ This light warns of an overheated engine — Liftgate Open Warning Light RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s condition. If the engine coolant temperature This indicator will turn when the liftgate is seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a open. and the light will turn on. When driving, if the single chime will sound. If the temperature NOTE: driver or front passenger seat belt remains reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will will be sound for four minutes or until the single chime. flash or remain on continuously and a chime engine is allowed to cool whichever comes will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints first. — Oil Pressure Warning Light Systems” in “Safety” for further information. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull This light indicates low engine oil pressure. over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is If the light turns on while driving, stop the on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the possible. A chime will sound when this light temperature reading does not return to nor- turns on.

75 — Transmission Temperature Warning — Vehicle Security Warning Light — If the ABS light remains on or turns on while Light — If Equipped If Equipped driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is This light indicates that there is excessive This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- required. However, the conventional brake transmission fluid temperature that might mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system will continue to operate normally if occur with severe usage such as trailer tow- alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly the brake warning light is not on. ing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and until the vehicle is disarmed. run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with If the ABS light is on, the brake system YellowWarning Lights the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until should be serviced as soon as possible to the light turns off. Once the light turns off, — Adaptive Cruise Control Fault restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If you may continue to drive normally. Warning Light — If Equipped the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ WARNING! This light will turn on when the ACC system RUN position, have the light inspected by an is not operating and needs service. For fur- authorized dealer. If you continue operating the vehicle when ther information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise the Transmission Temperature Warning Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light is illuminated you could cause the And Operating.” Warning Light — If Equipped fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot This light indicates the Electronic Stability engine or exhaust components and cause — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning a fire. Light Control (ESC) is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, CAUTION! tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the even if it was turned off previously. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated RUN position and may stay on for as long as The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENTwill PANEL eventually cause severe transmission four seconds. Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full damage or transmission failure. OFF in Drive Modes.

76 — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) — LaneSense Failure Warning Light — — Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light — If Equipped If Equipped Warning Light (MIL) The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument This light will turn on when the LaneSense The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator cluster will come on when the ignition is system is not operating and needs service. Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi- Please see your authorized dealer. System called OBD II that monitors engine tion, and when ESC is activated. It should go and automatic transmission control systems. out with the engine running. If the “ESC — LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped The light will illuminate when the ignition is Indicator Light” comes on continuously with in the ON/RUN position before engine start. the engine running, a malfunction has been The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yel- If the bulb does not come on when turning detected in the ESC system. If this light low when the vehicle is crossing a lane marker. the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the con- remains on after several ignition cycles, and dition checked promptly. the vehicle has been driven several miles Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph “Starting And Operating” for further informa- Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing tion. (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi- as possible to have the problem diagnosed — Low Fuel Warning Light nate the light after engine start. The vehicle and corrected. should be serviced if the light stays on When the fuel level reaches approximately through several typical driving styles. In most • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and situations, the vehicle will drive normally and “ESC Indicator Light” come on momen- remain on until fuel is added. tarily each time the ignition is placed in the will not require towing. ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- to alert serious conditions that could lead to ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — immediate loss of power or severe catalytic the sounds will stop when ESC becomes If Equipped converter damage. The vehicle should be ser- inactive. This indicator will illuminate when the wind- viced as soon as possible if this occurs. • This light will come on when the vehicle is shield washer fluid is low. in an ESC event. 77 functioning properly and that service is re- that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these WARNING! quired. We recommend you drive to the near- cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con- A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as est service center and have the vehicle ser- sumption may not be guaranteed. viced immediately. referenced above, can reach higher tem- Should one or more tires be in the condition peratures than in normal operating condi- — Forward Collision Warning Light — mentioned above, the display will show the tions. This can cause a fire if you drive indications corresponding to each tire in slowly or park over flammable substances If Equipped sequence. such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in This could result in death or serious injury the Forward Collision Warning System. Con- to the driver, occupants or others. CAUTION! tact your local authorized dealer for service. Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in Do not continue driving with one or more CAUTION! "Safety" for further information. flat tires as handling may be compro- mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp Prolonged driving with the Malfunction — Stop/Start System Fault Warning braking and steering. If a tire puncture Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam- Light — If Equipped occurs, repair immediately using the dedi- age to the vehicle control system. It also cated tire repair kit and contact your au- This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ could affect fuel economy and driveability. thorized dealer as soon as possible. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic Start system is not functioning properly and converter damage and power loss will soon service is required. Contact your authorized Each tire, including the spare (if provided), occur. Immediate service is required. dealer for service. should be checked monthly when cold and — Tire Pressure Monitoring System inflated to the inflation pressure recom- SERV 4WD — Service 4WD Warning Light — (TPMS) Warning Light mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure If Equipped The warning light switches on and a message label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different If the light stays on or comes on during is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL size than the size indicated on the vehicle driving, it means that the 4WD system is not is lower than the recommended value and/or

78 placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Your vehicle has also been equipped with a should determine the proper tire inflation TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when CAUTION! pressure for those tires.) the system is not operating properly. The The TPMS has been optimized for the TPMS malfunction indicator is combined As an added safety feature, your vehicle has original equipment tires and wheels. with the low tire pressure telltale. When the been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- TPMS pressures and warning have been system detects a malfunction, the telltale will ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire established for the tire size equipped on flash for approximately one minute and then pressure telltale when one or more of your your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- remain continuously illuminated. This se- tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- tion or sensor damage may result when quence will continue upon subsequent ve- ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- using replacement equipment that is not hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction minates, you should stop and check your tires of the same size, type, and/or style. After- exists. When the malfunction indicator is market wheels can cause sensor damage. as soon as possible, and inflate them to the illuminated, the system may not be able to Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause proper pressure. Driving on a significantly detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. the Tire Pressure Monitoring System under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation reasons, including the installation of replace- After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve- recommended that you take your vehicle to life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning your authorized dealer to have your sensor and stopping ability. properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- function checked. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute tion telltale after replacing one or more tires for proper tire maintenance, and it is the or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire the replacement or alternate tires and wheels pressure, even if under-inflation has not allow the TPMS to continue to function reached the level to trigger illumination of the properly. TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

79 YellowIndicator Lights Green Indicator Lights — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped — Air Suspension Light — If — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Equipped With No Target Detected Indicator Light — This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. This light will illuminate when the air suspen- If Equipped sion system is actively adjusting the ride This light will turn on when the Adaptive — LaneSense Indicator Light — If height. Cruise Control is SET and there is no target Equipped Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise The LaneSense indicator is solid green when Light — If Equipped Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting both lane markings have been detected and And Operating" for further information. This light indicates that Forward Collision the system is “armed” to provide visual Warning is off. — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set warnings in the instrument cluster and a With Target Light — If Equipped torque warning in the steering wheel if an — 4WD Low Indicator Light — If unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to Equipped This will display when the ACC is set and a “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is Operating” for further information. Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front “Starting And Operating” for further informa- — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to tion. This indicator will illuminate when the park rotate at the same speed. Low range provides — Cruise Control SET Indicator Light lights or headlights are turned on. a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in- creased torque at the wheels. This light will turn on when the speed control — Snow Mode Indicator Light is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If This light will turn on when Snow Mode is Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur- Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for active.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ther information. further information on four-wheel drive op- eration and proper use.

80 — Sport Mode Indicator Light — Turn Signal Indicator Lights Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active. The turn signal arrows will flash indepen- This light will turn on when Custom Mode dently when left or right turn signals are SRT is active. — Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light selected. Turn signals can be activated when Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op- This light will turn on when Sport Mode is the multifunction lever is moved down (left) erating” for further information active. or up (right). — Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op- NOTE: Light — If Equipped erating” for further information. • A continuous chime will sound if the ve- This indicator shows when the Hill Descent — Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp If Equipped with either turn signal on. will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb only be armed when the transfer case is in the This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/ if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed Start function is in “Autostop” mode. is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these — Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light White Indicator Lights conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready This light will turn on when Tow Mode is active. will flash on/off. Light — If Equipped Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op- — LaneSense Indicator Light — This light will turn on when the vehicle erating” for further information. If Equipped equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — Track Mode SRT Indicator Light has been turned on, but not set. Refer When the LaneSense system is ON, but not This light will turn on when Track Mode is to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If armed, the LaneSense indicator is solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or active. Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. neither line has been detected. If a single Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Op- lane line is detected, and the system is ready erating” for further information.

81 to provide only visual warnings if an uninten- — Cruise Control Ready Indicator Blue Indicator Lights tional lane departure occurs on detected lane Light line. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in — High Beam Indicator Light This light will turn on when the speed control “Starting And Operating” for further informa- This indicator shows that the high beam tion. has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting headlights are on. With the low beams acti- — Set Speed Warning Light — If And Operating” for further information. vated, push the multifunction lever forward Equipped (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the — Selec Speed Control Indicator high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rear- When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the Light — If Equipped ward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn speed warning telltale will illuminate in the off the high beams. Pull the lever toward you instrument cluster with a number matching This light will turn on when “Selec Speed for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" the set speed. When the set speed is ex- Control” is activated. scenario. ceeded, the indication will light up yellow To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the and flash along with a continuous chime (up vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC push the button on the Instrument Panel. exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on SYSTEM — OBD II and off in the instrument cluster display. NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated For further information refer to “Instru- If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. ment Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Get- Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in in the instrument cluster display. This system monitors the performance of the the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ emissions, engine, and transmission control — Valet Mode Indicator Light en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- systems. When these systems are operating dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian This light will turn on when Valet Mode is properly, your vehicle will provide excellent Residents). active. performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current govern- GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe INSTRUMENT PANEL number “55” is only an example of a ment regulations. speed that can be set.

82 If any of these systems require service, the the performance of your emissions controls. EMISSIONS INSPECTION OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Authorized service technicians may need to AND MAINTENANCE Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag- access this information to assist with the nostic codes and other information to assist diagnosis and service of your vehicle and PROGRAMS your service technician in making repairs. emissions system. In some localities, it may be a legal require- Although your vehicle will usually be drivable ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's and not need towing, see your authorized WARNING! emissions control system. Failure to pass dealer for service as soon as possible. could prevent vehicle registration. • ONLY an authorized service technician CAUTION! should connect equipment to the OBD II For states that require an Inspec- connection port in order to diagnose or tion and Maintenance (I/M), this • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could service your vehicle. check verifies the “Malfunction In- cause further damage to the emission • If unauthorized equipment is connected dicator Light (MIL)” is functioning control system. It could also affect fuel to the OBD II connection port, such as a and is not on when the engine is running, and economy and driveability. The vehicle driver-behavior tracking device, it may: that the OBD II system is ready for testing. must be serviced before any emissions • Be possible that vehicle systems, Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. tests can be performed. including safety related systems, The OBD II system may not be ready if your • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is could be impaired or a loss of ve- vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a running, severe catalytic converter dam- hicle control could occur that may dead battery or a battery replacement. If the age and power loss will soon occur. Im- result in an accident involving seri- OBD II system should be determined not mediate service is required. ous injury or death. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail • Access, or allow others to access, the test. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) information stored in your vehicle Cybersecurity systems, including personal informa- tion. Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection For further information, refer to “Cybersecu- port to allow access to information related to rity” in “Multimedia”. 83 Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain test, which you can use prior to going to the fully illuminated until you place the igni- test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II tion in the off position or start the engine. system is ready, you must do the following: This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys- tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi- station. tion, but do not crank or start the engine. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should NOTE: see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If you crank or start the engine, you will If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a have to start this test over. battery failure or replacement, you may need 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as the ON position, you will see the “Mal- you normally would in order for your OBD II function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol system to update. A recheck with the above come on as part of a normal bulb check. test routine may then indicate that the sys- 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of tem is now ready. two things will happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi- and then return to being fully illuminated nated during normal vehicle operation you until you turn OFF the ignition or start should have your vehicle serviced before go- the engine. This means that your vehicle's ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the not proceed to the I/M station. engine running. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

84 SAFETY

SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES ...... 86 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SAFETY TIPS ...... 137 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 86 SYSTEMS...... 106 Transporting Passengers ...... 137 Electronic Brake Control System .....87 Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .106 Exhaust Gas ...... 138 Important Safety Precautions ...... 106 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .97 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Seat Belt Systems...... 107 The Vehicle ...... 138 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 97 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS). .116 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .....99 Child Restraints ...... 125 Make Outside The Vehicle ...... 140 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .101 Transporting Pets ...... 137

85 • Brake pedal pulsations. SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end condition of the vehicle brakes and tires Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) of the stop. or the traction afforded. SAFETY The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides These are all normal characteristics of ABS. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in- increased vehicle stability and brake perfor- cluding those resulting from excessive mance under most braking conditions. The WARNING! speed in turns, following another vehicle system automatically prevents wheel lock, too closely, or hydroplaning. and enhances vehicle control during braking. • The ABS contains sophisticated elec- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped tronic equipment that may be suscep- vehicle must never be exploited in a The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en- tible to interference caused by improp- reckless or dangerous manner that could sure that the ABS is working properly each erly installed or high output radio jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety time the vehicle is started and driven. During transmitting equipment. This interfer- of others. this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock sound as well as some related motor noises. braking capability. Installation of such ABS is designed to function with the OEM ABS is activated during braking when the equipment should be performed by tires. Modification may result in degraded system detects one or more wheels begin to qualified professionals. ABS performance. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the or panic stops may increase the likelihood of The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” stopping distance longer. Just press ABS activation(s). will turn on when the ignition is turned to the firmly on your brake pedal when you ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as You also may experience the following when need to slow down or stop. four seconds. ABS activates: • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re- • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to nor can it increase braking or steering mains on or comes on while driving, it indi- run for a short time after the stop). efficiency beyond that afforded by the cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. 86 system is not functioning and that service is Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer “Brake System Warning Light” does not required. However, the conventional brake Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking come on when the ignition is turned to the system will continue to operate normally if (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on. Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control soon as possible. (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC). If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, Brake Assist System (BAS) the brake system should be serviced as soon Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock This function manages the distribution of the braking capability during emergency braking brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning braking torque between the front and rear maneuvers. The system detects an emer- Light” does not come on when the ignition is axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear gency braking situation by sensing the rate turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the and amount of brake application and then repaired as soon as possible. rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS Electronic Brake Control System can help reduce braking distances. The BAS before the front axle. complements the anti-lock brake system Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Brake System Warning Light (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re- Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis- The red “Brake System Warning Light” will the benefit of the system, you must apply tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System turn on when the ignition is turned to the continuous braking pressure during the stop- (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), four seconds. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec- If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains braking is no longer desired. Once the brake tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems on or comes on while driving, it indicates that pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. work together to enhance both vehicle stabil- the brake system is not functioning properly ity and control in various driving conditions. and that immediate service is required. If the

87 The following conditions must be met in WARNING! order for HSA to activate: WARNING! active driving involvement. It is always the The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot • The feature must be enabled. prevent the natural laws of physics from driver’s responsibility to be attentive to SAFETY acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase • The vehicle must be stopped. distance to other vehicles, people, and the traction afforded by prevailing road • Park brake must be off. objects, and most importantly brake op- eration to ensure safe operation of the conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, • Driver door must be closed. including those resulting from excessive vehicle under all road conditions. Your speed in turns, driving on very slippery • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities • The gear selection must match vehicle up- your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in ings can result in a collision or serious exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in personal injury. ner, which could jeopardize the user's REVERSE gear). safety or the safety of others. • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate Disabling And Enabling HSA if the transmission is in PARK or NEU- Hill Start Assist (HSA) This feature can be turned on or turned off. TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual To change the current setting, proceed as The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA follows: back from a complete stop while on an in- will remain active. cline. If the driver releases the brake while • If disabling HSA using your instrument stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to WARNING! cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster hold the brake pressure for a short period. Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- There may be situations where the Hill ment Panel” for further information. If the driver does not apply the throttle before Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, this time expires, the system will release slight rolling may occur, such as on minor refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while media” for further information. the hill as normal. pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

88 For vehicles not equipped with an instrument Towing With HSA Traction Control System (TCS) cluster display, perform the following steps: HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate This system monitors the amount of wheel spin 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels roll back while towing a trailer. of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is pointing straight forward). detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. WARNING! the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and 3. Apply the parking brake. • If you use a trailer brake controller with stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited your trailer, the trailer brakes may be 4. Start the engine. Differential (BLD), functions similar to a lim- activated and deactivated with the brake ited slip differential and controls the wheel 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more switch. If so, there may not be enough spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a than one-half turn to the left. brake pressure to hold both the vehicle driven axle is spinning faster than the other, 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid roll- the system will apply the brake of the spinning lower switch bank below the climate con- wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be trol four times within 20 seconds. The ing down an incline while resuming ac- applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on celeration, manually activate the trailer may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in and turn off two times. brake or apply more vehicle brake pres- sure prior to releasing the brake pedal. a reduced mode. 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and then an additional slightly more than the parking brake fully when exiting your one-half turn to the right. vehicle. Also, be certain to place the This system enhances directional control and 8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and transmission in PARK. stability of the vehicle under various driving then back to ON. If the sequence was • Failure to follow these warnings can re- conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica- sult in a collision or serious personal understeering of the vehicle by applying the tor Light” will blink several times to con- injury. brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in firm HSA is disabled. counteracting the oversteer or understeer 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return condition. Engine power may also be reduced this feature to its previous setting. to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. 89 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and WARNING! WARNING! braking system, tire type and size or compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can- wheel size may adversely affect ESC When the actual path does not match the not prevent the natural laws of physics SAFETY performance. Improperly inflated and intended path, ESC applies the brake of the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it unevenly worn tires may also degrade appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting increase the traction afforded by prevail- ESC performance. Any vehicle modifica- the oversteer or understeer condition. ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent tion or poor vehicle maintenance that accidents, including those resulting • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning reduces the effectiveness of the ESC from excessive speed in turns, driving on more than appropriate for the steering system can increase the risk of loss of very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. wheel position. vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per- ESC also cannot prevent accidents re- sonal injury and death. • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning sulting from loss of vehicle control due less than appropriate for the steering wheel to inappropriate driver input for the con- position. ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill- ESC Operating Modes ful driver can prevent accidents. The The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle Light” located in the instrument cluster will NOTE: must never be exploited in a reckless or start to flash as soon as the ESC system Depending upon model and mode of opera- dangerous manner which could jeopar- becomes active. The “ESC Activation/ tion, the ESC system may have multiple op- dize the user’s safety or the safety of erating modes. Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes others. when the TCS is active. If the “ESC • Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop- ESC On Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be- erly maintain your vehicle, may change This is the normal operating mode for the gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the handling characteristics of your ve- ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the the accelerator and apply as little throttle as hicle, and may negatively affect the per- ESC system will be in this mode. This mode possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and formance of the ESC system. Changes driving to the prevailing road conditions. to the steering system, suspension,

90 should be used for most driving conditions. “ESC OFF” message will display in the in- Alternate ESC modes should only be used for WARNING! strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again, specific reasons as noted in the following • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch. paragraphs. functionality of ESC, (except for the lim- NOTE: ited slip feature described in the TCS Partial Off System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to section), has been disabled and the “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- predetermined speed. When the vehicle when a more spirited driving experience is nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the speed slows below the predetermined speed desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC engine power reduction feature of TCS is thresholds for activation, which allows for disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta- the system will return to ESC “Full Off”. more wheel spin than normally allowed. This bility offered by the ESC system is re- “Full Off” can only be achieved in Track mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes duced. Mode if so equipped. stuck. • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial ESC modes may also be affected by drive To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily Off” mode. modes if so equipped. push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the Full Off — If Equipped WARNING! ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” This mode is intended for off-highway or • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine will turn off. off-road use only and should not be used on torque reduction and stability features any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and are disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve- NOTE: ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the hicle stability offered by the ESC system For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive a momentary button push will toggle the ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle maneuver, the ESC system will not en- mode. Multiple momentary button pushed is stopped with the engine running. After five gage to assist in maintaining stability. may be required to return to ESC On. seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the off-highway or off-road use only.

91 ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the WARNING! tor Light” comes on continuously with the en- ESC system will be on even if it was turned • With the ESC switched off, the en- gine running, a malfunction has been detected off previously. hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC in the ESC system. If this light remains on after • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- SAFETY is unavailable. In an emergency evasive several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; maneuver, the ESC system will not en- driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds the sounds will stop when ESC becomes gage to assist in maintaining stability. greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- inactive following the maneuver that ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for rized dealer as soon as possible to have the caused the ESC activation. off-highway or off-road use. problem diagnosed and corrected. • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator indicates the customer has ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it Light” (located in the instrument cluster) elected to have the Electronic increase the traction afforded by prevail- starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction Stability Control (ESC) in a re- ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC duced mode. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also all accidents, including those resulting Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) from excessive speed in turns, driving on flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins This system anticipates the potential for ESC also cannot prevent collisions. to flash during acceleration, ease up on the wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos- wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving When ERM determines that the rate of ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light to the prevailing road conditions. change of the steering wheel angle and vehi- cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause And ESC OFF Indicator Light NOTE: wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate The “ESC Activation/Malfunction • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator brake and may also reduce engine power to Indicator Light” in the instrument Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. cluster will come on when the igni- come on momentarily each time the igni- tion is turned to the ON mode. It tion is turned ON. should go out with the engine run- 92 ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift Trailer Sway Control (TSC) occurring during severe or evasive driving WARNING! TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to an excessively swaying trailer and will take If TSC activates while driving, slow the other factors, such as road conditions, leav- the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe ing the roadway, or striking objects or other sway. TSC will become active automatically location, and adjust the trailer load to vehicles. once an excessively swaying trailer is recog- eliminate trailer sway. NOTE: nized. ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full NOTE: Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time Always use caution when towing a trailer and complete explanation of the available ESC required to reach full braking during emer- follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- modes. gency braking situations. It anticipates when tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting an emergency braking situation may occur by And Operating” for further information. WARNING! monitoring how fast the throttle is released by When TSC is functioning, the “ESC the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake Many factors, such as vehicle loading, Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will system for a panic stop. road conditions and driving conditions, flash, the engine power may be reduced and influence the chance that wheel lift or you may feel the brakes being applied to Rain Brake Support (RBS) rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all individual wheels to attempt to stop the Rain Brake Support may improve braking wheel lift or roll overs, especially those trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when performance in wet conditions. It will periodi- that involve leaving the roadway or striking the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full cally apply a small amount of brake pressure objects or other vehicles. The capabilities Off” modes. to remove any water buildup on the front of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never brake rotors. It functions when the wind- be exploited in a reckless or dangerous shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When manner which could jeopardize the user's Rain Brake Support is active, there is no safety or the safety of others. notification to the driver and no driver inter- action is required. 93 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Activating HDC Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the HDC is intended for low speed off road driv- Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto- ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) mod- ing while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains matically if driven down a grade of sufficient

SAFETY ules that provides torque at the steering vehicle speed while descending hills during magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select- wheel for certain driving conditions in which various driving situations. HDC controls ve- able by the driver, and can be adjusted by the ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil- hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. using the gear shift +/-. The following sum- ity. The torque that the steering wheel re- HDC has three states: marizes the HDC set speeds: ceives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/ 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not HDC Target Set Speeds maintain vehicle stability. The only notifica- activate). • P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but tion the driver receives that the feature is 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but will not activate active is the torque applied to the steering activation conditions are not met, or • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) wheel. driver is actively overriding with brake or • N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) NOTE: throttle application). • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) The DST feature is only meant to help the 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively driver realize the correct course of action controlling vehicle speed). • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) through small torques on the steering wheel, Enabling HDC • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied but the following conditions must also be met • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) torque. It is very important to realize that this to enable HDC: • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range the driver is still responsible for steering the • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) vehicle. • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) • Parking brake is released. • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) • Driver door is closed. • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped 94 NOTE: Disabling HDC • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for for several seconds then extinguish when HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any HDC target speed selection, but will not af- the driver pushes the HDC switch but en- of the following conditions occur: fect the gear chosen by the transmission. able conditions are not met. When actively controlling HDC the transmis- • The driver pushes the HDC switch. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash sion will shift appropriately for the driver- • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low for several seconds then extinguish when selected set speed and corresponding driving Range. HDC disables due to excess speed. conditions. • The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash Driver Override when HDC deactivates due to overheated • Driver door opens. brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will The driver may override HDC activation with activate again once the brakes have cooled throttle or brake application at anytime. • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. sufficiently. Deactivating HDC • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph HDC will be deactivated but remain available (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). WARNING! if any of the following conditions occur: • HDC detects excessive brake temperature. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle controlling vehicle speed when descend- or brake application. Feedback To The Driver ing hills. The driver must remain attentive • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi- feedback to the driver about the state HDC cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on is in. Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped an uphill grade. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu- SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low • Vehicle is shifted to park. minate and remain on solid when HDC is Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by enabled or activated. This is the normal actively controlling engine torque and brakes. operating condition for HDC.

95 SSC has three states: Activating SSC • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not Once SSC is enabled it will activate automati- • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) activate). cally once the following conditions are met: • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)

SAFETY 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but • Driver releases throttle. • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped activation conditions are not met, or • Driver releases brake. driver is actively overriding with brake or • REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h) throttle application). • Transmission is in any selection other • NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) than P. 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively • PARK = SSC remains enabled but not controlling vehicle speed). • Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). active Enabling SSC The set speed for SSC is selectable by the NOTE: driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may • During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for but the following conditions must also be met be reduced when climbing a grade and the SSC target speed selection but will not to enable SSC: level of set speed reduction depends on the affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the trans- • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. magnitude of grade. The following summa- mission will shift appropriately for the rizes the SSC set speeds: • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). driver-selected set speed and correspond- • Parking brake is released. SSC Target Set Speeds ing driving conditions. • Driver door is closed. • 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h) • SSC performance is influenced by the Ter- • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) rain Select mode. This difference may be • Driver is not applying throttle. notable to the driver and may be perceived • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) as a varying level of aggressiveness. • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

96 Driver Override: • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. WARNING! The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time. • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph SSC is only intended to assist the driver in (64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately). controlling vehicle speed when driving in Deactivating SSC off road conditions. The driver must re- Feedback To The Driver: SSC will be deactivated but remain available main attentive to the driving conditions if any of the following conditions occur: The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle the SSC switch has an LED which offer feed- or brake application. back to the driver about the state SSC is in. • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu- AUXILIARY DRIVING but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). minate and remain on solid when SSC is SYSTEMS • Vehicle is shifted to PARK. enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC. Disabling SSC Blind Spot Monitoring • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of for several seconds then extinguish when The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system the following conditions occur: the driver pushes the SSC switch but en- uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect Highway able conditions are not met. • The driver pushes the SSC switch. licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo- • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash torcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones Range. for several seconds then extinguish when from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. SSC disables due to excess speed. • The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash • Driver door opens. then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.

97 The BSM detection zone covers approxi- system sensors operate when the vehicle is in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mately one lane width on both sides of the any forward gear or REVERSE and enters The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in- vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. tended to aid the driver when backing out of at the outside rear view mirror and extends

SAFETY The BSM warning light, located in the out- parking spaces where the vision of oncoming approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system moves into a blind spot zone. cautiously out of the parking space until the monitors the detection zones on both sides of rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches system will then have a clear view of the cross approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is de- will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. tected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety” in the Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for more information. Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are Rear Detection Zones Blind Spot Warning Light available in the Uconnect System. Refer to When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning The BSM system can also be configured to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the light will momentarily illuminate in both out- sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ side rear view mirrors to let the driver know radio to notify you of objects that have en- care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or that the system is operational. The BSM tered the detection zones. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. 98 Blind Spot Alert Lights Only NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Whenever an audible alert is requested by the Rules and with Industry Canada license- When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system, the radio is also muted. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- BSM system will provide a visual alert in the ject to the following two conditions: appropriate side view mirror based on a de- When the system is in RCP, the system shall tected object. However, when the system is respond with both visual and audible alerts 1. This device may not cause harmful operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the when a detected object is present. Whenever interference. system will respond with both visual and an audible alert is requested, the radio is also 2. This device must accept any interference audible alerts when a detected object is pres- muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; received, including interference that may ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the RCP state always requests the chime. cause undesired operation. the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Off NOTE: Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When the BSM system is turned off there will Changes or modifications not expressly ap- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ be no visual or audible alerts from either the proved by the party responsible for compli- Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a BSM or RCP systems. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror ate the equipment. NOTE: based on a detected object. If the turn signal The BSM system will store the current oper- Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is then activated, and it corresponds to an ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each alert present on that side of the vehicle, an The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system time the vehicle is started the previously audible chime will also be sounded. When- provides the driver with audible and visual stored mode will be recalled and used. ever a turn signal and detected object are warnings within the instrument cluster dis- present on the same side at the same time, General Information play to warn the driver when it detects a both the visual and audible alerts will be potential frontal collision. The warnings are The following regulatory statement applies to issued. In addition to the audible alert the intended to provide the driver with enough all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in radio (if on) will also be muted. time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential this vehicle: collision.

99 NOTE: quately in the event of a potential frontal More cautious drivers that do not mind fre- FCW monitors the information from the for- collision, but maintains the audible and quent warnings may prefer this setting. ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic visual warnings. NOTE: Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob- • Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents

SAFETY This setting gives you the most reaction time. ability of a forward collision. When the sys- the system from providing autonomous tem determines that a forward collision is braking, or additional brake support if the Medium probable, the driver will be provided with driver is not braking adequately in the event The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” audible and visual warnings. of a potential frontal collision. If FCW is set setting and the system status is “Warning & Changing FCW System Status to “Off”, “FCW OFF” will appear in the Braking”. This allows the system to warn the instrument cluster display. driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in The Forward Collision Warning settings are front using audible/visual warnings and it ap- located in the Uconnect display in the con- Changing FCW Sensitivity plies autonomous braking. trols settings. The FCW feature has three settings and can be changed within the Uconnect System Near NOTE: Screen: Changing the FCW sensitivity to the “Near” • The default sensitivity of FCW is the • Far “Medium” setting and the system status is setting, allows the system to warn you of a “Warning & Braking”. This allows the sys- • Medium potential frontal collision when you are much closer. tem to warn the driver of a possible colli- • Near sion with the vehicle in front using audible/ This setting provides less reaction time than visual warnings and it applies autonomous Far the “Far” setting, which allows for a more braking. The far setting provides warnings for poten- dynamic driving experience. • Changing the FCW status to “Only Warn- tial collisions more distant in front of the More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want ing” prevents the system from providing vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this limited active braking, or additional brake reaction time to avoid a collision. setting. support if the driver is not braking ade-

100 Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/ recommended a vehicle maximum speed of The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of pressure if the tire pressure falls below the or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) 50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does not low pressure warning threshold for any rea- for further details. recommend using the run flat feature while son, including low temperature effects, or driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or natural pressure loss through the tire. towing a trailer. WARNING! The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) low tire pressure as long as the condition intended to avoid a collision on its own, will warn the driver of a low tire pressure exists, and will not turn off until the tire nor can FCW detect every type of potential based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure is at or above recommended cold collision. The driver has the responsibility pressure. tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure to avoid a collision by controlling the ve- warning has been illuminated, the tire pres- The tire pressure will vary with temperature hicle via braking and steering. Failure to sure must be increased to the recommended by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). follow this warning could lead to serious cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pres- This means that when the outside tempera- injury or death. sure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned ture decreases, the tire pressure will de- off. crease. Tire pressure should always be set Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is NOTE: NOTE: defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — has not been driven for at least three hours, or need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a (30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- 14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tire three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servic- ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure pressure and replace the tire at the first ing And Maintenance” for information on how to Monitoring Telltale Light off. opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire The system will automatically update and the 14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat pressure will also increase as the vehicle is Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will mode of operation. In this condition, it is driven - this is normal and there should be no extinguish once the updated tire pressures adjustment for this increased pressure.

101 have been received. The vehicle may need to NOTE: CAUTION! be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- been established for the tire size (24 km/h) to receive this information. mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable vide warning of a tire failure or condition. SAFETY For example, your vehicle has a recom- system operation or sensor damage may mended cold (parked for more than three result when using replacement equip- • The TPMS should not be used as a tire hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). ment that is not of the same size, type, pressure gauge while adjusting your tire If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and/or style. The TPM sensor is not de- pressure. and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi signed for use on aftermarket wheels • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) and may contribute to a poor overall causes the tire to overheat and can lead to will decrease the tire pressure to approxi- system performance or sensor damage. tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is Customers are encouraged to use OEM fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire wheels to assure proper TPM feature affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving operation. ability. the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise • Using aftermarket tire sealants may • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon- Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- sibility to maintain correct tire pressure still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure able. After using an aftermarket tire using an accurate tire gauge, even if under- Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only sealant it is recommended that you take inflation has not reached the level to trigger after the tires have been inflated to the vehi- your vehicle to an authorized dealership illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring cle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. to have your sensor function checked. Telltale Light. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire • Seasonal temperature changes will affect pressure, always reinstall the valve stem tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor CAUTION! cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt the actual tire pressure in the tire. • The TPMS has been optimized for the from entering the valve stem, which original equipment tires and wheels. could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor- TPMS pressures and warnings have ing Sensor.

102 The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) NOTE: uses wireless technology with wheel rim- consists of the following components: Your system can be set to display pressure mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire • Receiver Module units in PSI, BAR or kPa. pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors pressure readings to the Receiver Module. • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres- sures • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instru- ment cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display addition, the instrument cluster will display Should a low tire condition occur on any of an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic Tire Pressure Monitor Display the four active road tire(s), you should stop as display of the pressure value(s) with the low soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) tire(s) in a different color. Refer to “Instru- NOTE: that is in a different color on the graphic It is particularly important, for you to regu- ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- display to the vehicle’s recommended cold larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” and to maintain the proper pressure. tion. message.

103 NOTE: If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may will repeat, providing the system fault still Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the remain ON, a chime will sound, and the (30 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no instrument cluster display will still display a SAFETY ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" pressure value in the different color graphic Monitoring Telltale Light off. message will not be present, and a pressure display and an “Inflate to XX” message will value will be displayed instead of dashes. be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up The system will automatically update, the A system fault can occur by any of the follow- to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the Tire Pres- ing: Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will sure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish • Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- flash on and off for 75 seconds and then once the updated tire pressure(s) have been ing next to facilities emitting the same remain on solid. In addition, the instrument received. The vehicle may need to be driven Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then • Installing some form of aftermarket window (24 km/h) to receive this information. display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure tinting that affects radio wave signals. value. For each subsequent ignition switch Service TPM System Warning • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will wheel housings. Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain • Using tire chains on the vehicle. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and on solid when a system fault is detected. the instrument cluster display will display a • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM The system fault will also sound a chime. The "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five sensors. instrument cluster display will display a “SER- seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum NOTE: of the pressure value. Once you repair or of five seconds. This message is then followed There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in replace the original road tire, and reinstall it by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire monitor the tire pressure. If you install the TPMS will update automatically. Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being spare tire in place of a road tire that has received. a pressure below the low-pressure warning 104 In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then General Information tale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the remain on. The instrument cluster will dis- The following regulatory statement applies to instrument cluster display will display a new play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long and then display dashes (--) in place of the this vehicle: as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure pressure values. warning limit in any of the four active road This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the Rules and with Industry Canada license- up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in TPMS will no longer chime or display the exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- order for the TPMS to receive this informa- “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the ject to the following two conditions: tion. instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- in place of the pressure values. TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped ference, and To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four (2) This device must accept any interference The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) received, including interference that may tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive with wheel and tire assemblies that do not cause undesired operation. the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the NOTE: winter wheel and tire assemblies on your "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for Changes or modifications not expressly ap- vehicle. 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument proved by the party responsible for compli- To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS- ance could void the user’s authority to oper- wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with TEM” message and then display pressure ate the equipment. tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni- values in place of the dashes. On the next toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The message will no longer be displayed as long TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" as no system fault exists.

105 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT Here are some simple steps you can take to 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder SYSTEMS minimize the risk of harm from a deploying belt behind them or under their arm. air bag: 5. You should read the instructions provided Some of the most important safety features in 1. Children 12 years old and under should with your child restraint to make sure that SAFETY your vehicle are the restraint systems: always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a you are using it properly. rear seat. Occupant Restraint Systems Features 6. All occupants should always wear their lap 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a and shoulder belts properly. • Seat Belt Systems rear-facing child restraint) must ride in 7. The driver and front passenger seats • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air the front passenger seat, move the seat as should be moved back as far as practical Bags far back as possible and use the proper to allow the front air bags room to inflate. child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” • Supplemental Active Head Restraints in this section for further information). 8. Do not lean against the door or window. • Child Restraints If your vehicle has side air bags, and 3. Children that are not big enough to wear deployment occurs, the side air bags will Some of the safety features described in this the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to inflate forcefully into the space between section may be standard equipment on some “Child Restraints” in this section for fur- occupants and the door and occupants models, or may be optional equipment on ther information) should be secured in a could be injured. others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs rized dealer. or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or to be modified to accommodate a dis- Important Safety Precautions belt-positioning booster seats should ride abled person, refer to the “Customer properly buckled up in a vehicle with a Assistance” section for customer service Please pay close attention to the information rear seat. contact information. in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

106 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Warning Sequence WARNING! (BeltAlert) The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated • Never place a rear-facing child restraint Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) when the vehicle is moving above a specified in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- vehicle speed range and the driver or out- BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind senger front air bag can cause death or board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if the driver and outboard front seat passenger serious injury to a child 12 years or equipped with outboard front passenger seat (if equipped with outboard front passenger younger, including a child in a rear- BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The facing child restraint. BeltAlert is not active when the outboard Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni- • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a front passenger seat is unoccupied). The tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi- vehicle with a rear seat. BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking tion. the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding Seat Belt Systems Initial Indication an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition Buckle up even though you are an excellent Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- driver, even on short trips. Someone on the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If road may be a poor driver and could cause a sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if collision that includes you. This can happen until the driver and occupied outboard front equipped with outboard front passenger seat far away from home or on your own street. seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition driver should instruct all occupants to buckle Research has shown that seat belts save switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- their seat belts. lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on injuries in a collision. Some of the worst and remain on until both outboard front seat Change of Status injuries happen when people are thrown from belts are buckled. The outboard front passen- If the driver or outboard front seat passenger the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out- (if equipped with outboard front passenger of ejection and the risk of injury caused by board front passenger seat is unoccupied. striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

107 while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert Lap/Shoulder Belts warning sequence will begin until the seat WARNING! All seating positions in your vehicle are belts are buckled again. the vehicle. Always be sure you and equipped with lap/shoulder belts. others in your vehicle are buckled up

SAFETY The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert properly. is not active when the outboard front passen- The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- triggered when an animal or other items are feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal sion, people riding in these areas are more placed on the outboard front passenger seat likely to be seriously injured or killed. or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking • Do not allow people to ride in any area of It is recommended that pets be restrained in your vehicle that is not equipped with the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. seats and seat belts. pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in and cargo is properly stowed. a seat and using a seat belt properly. WARNING! BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by Occupants, including the driver, should your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not • Relying on the air bags alone could lead always wear their seat belts whether or recommend deactivating BeltAlert. to more severe injuries in a collision. The not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of NOTE: air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, severe injury or death in the event of a If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the crash. driver or outboard front seat passenger (if the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could equipped with outboard front passenger seat make your injuries in a collision much BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re- air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers worse. You might suffer internal injuries, minder Light will turn on and remain on until can suffer much greater injuries if you or you could even slide out of the seat the driver and outboard front seat passenger are not properly buckled up. You can belt. Follow these instructions to wear seat belts are buckled. strike the interior of your vehicle or other your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers, or you can be thrown out of passengers safe, too.

108 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! • Two people should never be belted into a lap portion could ride too high on your • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart single seat belt. People belted together body, possibly causing internal injuries. in a collision and leave you with no can crash into one another in a collision, Always buckle your seat belt into the protection. Inspect the seat belt system hurting one another badly. Never use a buckle nearest you. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more • A seat belt that is too loose will not loose parts. Damaged parts must be re- than one person, no matter what their protect you properly. In a sudden stop, placed immediately. Do not disassemble size. you could move too far forward, increas- or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt ing the possibility of injury. Wear your assemblies must be replaced after a col- seat belt snugly. lision. WARNING! • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is • A lap belt worn too high can increase the dangerous. Your body could strike the Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli- forces won’t be at the strong hip and sion, increasing head and neck injury. A 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. seat belt worn under the arm can cause back and adjust the seat. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back as low as possible and keep it snug. shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over of the front seat, and next to your arm in your shoulder so that your strongest • A twisted seat belt may not protect you the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a bones will take the force in a collision. properly. In a collision, it could even cut rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull • A shoulder belt placed behind you will into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up not protect you from injury during a against your body, without twists. If you the webbing as far as necessary to allow collision. You are more likely to hit your can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve- the seat belt to go around your lap. hicle, take it to your authorized dealer head in a collision if you do not wear your immediately and have it fixed. shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong are meant to be used together. buckle will not protect you properly. The

109 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure and lies low across your hips, below your Use the following procedure to untwist a abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt twisted lap/shoulder belt. portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. SAFETY To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the 1. Position the latch plate as close as pos- latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug sible to the anchor point. seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) the seat belt in a collision. above the latch plate, grasp and twist the 5. Position the shoulder belt across the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a shoulder and chest with minimal, if any fold that begins immediately above the slack so that it is comfortable and not latch plate. resting on your neck. The retractor will 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. folded webbing. The folded webbing must 6. To release the seat belt, push the red enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. Pulling Out The Latch Plate button on the buckle. The seat belt will 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it 1 — Seat Belt automatically retract to its stowed posi- clears the folded webbing and the seat 2 — Seat Belt Buckle tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate belt is no longer twisted. down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, In the driver and front passenger seats, the insert the latch plate into the buckle until top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted you hear a “click.” upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the

110 anchorage button to release the anchorage, NOTE: Seat Belt Extender and move it up or down to the position that The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, serves you best. age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This even when the webbing is fully extended and feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage be adjusted in the upward position without (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your pushing or squeezing the release button. To authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor- be used only if the existing seat belt is not age until it is locked into position. long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is WARNING! not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much WARNING! worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is belt. Follow these instructions to wear physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT Adjustable Anchorage your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when As a guide, if you are shorter than average, • Position the shoulder belt across the worn, the distance between the front you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage shoulder and chest with minimal, if any edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle in a lower position, and if you are taller than slack so that it is comfortable and not and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. average, you will prefer the shoulder belt resting on your neck. The retractor will • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not anchorage in a higher position. After you withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. needed can increase the risk of serious release the anchorage button, try to move it • Misadjustment of the seat belt could injury or death in a collision. Only use up or down to make sure that it is locked in reduce the effectiveness of the safety the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt position. belt in a crash. 111 Position the lap belt snug and low below the Energy Management Feature WARNING! abdomen and across the strong bones of the The front seat belt system is equipped with is not long enough and only use in the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest an Energy Management feature that may help recommended seating positions. Re- and away from the neck. Never place the

SAFETY further reduce the risk of injury in the event move and store the Seat Belt Extender shoulder belt behind the back or under the of a collision. The seat belt system has a when not needed. arm. retractor assembly that is designed to release Seat Belt Pretensioner webbing in a controlled manner. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women The front seat belt system is equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor pretensioning devices that are designed to (ALR) remove slack from the seat belt in the event The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- of a collision. These devices may improve the tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- performance of the seat belt by removing matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used slack from the seat belt early in a collision. to secure a child restraint system. For addi- Pretensioners work for all size occupants, tional information, refer to “Installing Child including those in child restraints. Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un- NOTE: der the “Child Restraints” section of this These devices are not a substitute for proper manual. The figure below illustrates the lock- Pregnant Women And Seat Belts seat belt placement by the occupant. The ing feature for each seating position. seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi- Seat belts must be worn by all occupants tioned properly. including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu- mother and the unborn child if they are pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air wearing a seat belt. bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. 112 In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt will still retract to remove any slack in the belt. shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- a seating position that has a seat belt with ward until the entire seat belt is extracted. this feature. Children 12 years old and under 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat should always be properly restrained in a belt retracts, you will hear a clicking vehicle with a rear seat. sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. WARNING! Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Locations • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt If the passenger seating position is equipped senger front air bag can cause death and allow it to retract completely to disen- with an ALR and is being used for normal or serious injury to a child 12 years or gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti- usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far younger, including a child in a rear- vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- enough to comfortably wrap around the occu- facing child restraint. ing mode. pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a vehicle with a rear seat. clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow WARNING! the webbing to retract completely in this case • The seat belt assembly must be replaced and then carefully pull out only the amount of if the switchable Automatic Locking Re- webbing necessary to comfortably wrap tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the belt function is not working properly latch plate into the buckle until you hear a when checked according to the proce- "click." dures in the Service Manual.

113 How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components: WARNING! The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) de- • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly termines whether the severity or type of rear could increase the risk of injury in colli-

SAFETY impact will require the Active Head Re- sions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode straints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact to restrain occupants who are wearing requires deployment, both the driver and the seat belt or children who are using front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. booster seats. The locked mode is only When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the used to install rear-facing or forward- front half of the head restraint extends for- facing child restraints that have a har- ward to minimize the gap between the back ness for restraining the child. of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. These head restraints are passive, deployable Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components components, and vehicles with this equip- NOTE: ment cannot be readily identified by any The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or 1 — Head Restraint Front Half markings, only through visual inspection of may not deploy in the event of a front or side (Soft Foam And Trim) the head restraint. The head restraint will be impact. However, if during a front impact, a 2 — Head Restraint Back Half split in two halves, with the front half being secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) soft foam and trim, the back half being deco- deploy based on the severity and type of the 3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes rative plastic. impact. 4 — Seat Back

114 NOTE: If the Active Head Restraints are triggered WARNING! For more information on properly adjusting during a collision, the front half of the head • All occupants, including the driver, and positioning the head restraint, refer to restraint will be extended forward and sepa- should not operate a vehicle or sit in a “Supplemental Active Head Restraints” in rated from the rear half of the head restraint vehicle’s seat until the head restraints “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.” (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint are placed in their proper positions in Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) order to minimize the risk of neck injury must be reset into the original position to best in the event of a collision. protect the occupant for all types of colli- • Do not place items over the top of the sions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must Active Head Restraint, such as coats, reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front seat covers or portable DVD players. passenger’s seat before driving. Personally These items may interfere with the op- attempting to reset the AHRs may result in eration of the Active Head Restraint in damage to the AHRs that could impair their the event of a collision and could result function. in serious injury or death. • Active Head Restraints may be deployed WARNING! if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid acci- Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all types of collisions. Have de- dental deployment of the Active Head ployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer Restraint, ensure that all cargo is se- immediately. cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.

115 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Front and Side Impact Sensors The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Some of the safety features described in this • Seat Belt Pretensioners Warning Light if a malfunction is detected section may be standard equipment on some Air Bag Warning Light that could affect the air bag system. The

SAFETY models, or may be optional equipment on diagnostics also record the nature of the others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- The ORC monitors the readiness of the malfunction. While the air bag system is rized dealer. electronic parts of the air bag system when- designed to be maintenance free, if any of ever the ignition switch is in the START or The air bag system must be ready to protect the following occurs, have an authorized ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint dealer service the air bag system immedi- the OFF position or in the ACC position, the Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir- ately. cuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system is not on and the air bags will with the electrical Air Bag System Compo- not inflate. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the on during the four to eight seconds when The ORC contains a backup power supply the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN following Air Bag System Components: system that may deploy the air bag system position. even if the battery loses power or it becomes Air Bag System Components • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after disconnected prior to deployment. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) the four to eight-second interval. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light • Air Bag Warning Light • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter- in the instrument panel for approximately mittently or remains on while driving. • Steering Wheel and Column four to eight seconds for a self-check when • Instrument Panel the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN NOTE: position. After the self-check, the Air Bag If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en- • Knee Impact Bolsters Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects gine related gauges are not working, the Oc- • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags a malfunction in any part of the system, it cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also • Seat Belt Buckle Switch turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either be disabled. In this condition the air bags momentarily or continuously. A single chime may not be ready to inflate for your protec- • Supplemental Side Air Bags will sound to alert you if the light comes on tion. Have an authorized dealer service the • Supplemental Knee Air Bags again after initial startup. air bag system immediately. 116 remains on while driving have an authorized WARNING! dealer service the vehicle immediately. For Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your additional information regarding the Redun- instrument panel could mean you won’t dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting have the air bag system to protect you in a To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of collision. If the light does not come on as a this manual. bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if Front Air Bags it comes on as you drive, have an autho- This vehicle has front air bags and lap/ rized dealer service the air bag system shoulder belts for both the driver and front immediately. passenger. The front air bags are a supple- Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light driver front air bag is mounted in the center of 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags the steering wheel. The passenger front air 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/ bag is mounted in the instrument panel, detected, which could affect the Supplemen- Supplemental Knee Air Bag tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant above the glove compartment. The words Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag WARNING! Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will • Being too close to the steering wheel or sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag instrument panel during front air bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has deployment could cause serious injury, been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag including death. Air bags need room to Warning Light comes on intermittently or inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

117 This vehicle may be equipped with a driver WARNING! and/or front passenger seat belt buckle WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint switch that detects whether the driver or front air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt your seat belts even though you have air SAFETY senger front air bag can cause death or buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of bags. serious injury to a child 12 years or the Advanced Front Air Bags. younger, including a child in a rear- Front Air Bag Operation facing child restraint. Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a WARNING! tional protection by supplementing the seat vehicle with a rear seat. • No objects should be placed over or near belts. Front air bags are not expected to the air bag on the instrument panel or reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features steering wheel because any such objects rollover collisions. The front air bags will not The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul- could cause harm if the vehicle is in a deploy in all frontal collisions, including tistage driver and front passenger air bags. collision severe enough to cause the air some that may produce substantial vehicle This system provides output appropriate to bag to inflate. damage — for example, some pole collisions, • Do not put anything on or around the air the severity and type of collision as deter- truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. bag covers or attempt to open them mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller manually. You may damage the air bags On the other hand, depending on the type (ORC), which may receive information from and you could be injured because the air and location of impact, front air bags may the front impact sensors (if equipped) or bags may no longer be functional. The deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end other system components. protective covers for the air bag cush- damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The first stage inflator is triggered immedi- ions are designed to open only when the ately during an impact that requires air bag air bags are inflating. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deployment. A low energy output is used in • Relying on the air bags alone could lead deceleration over time, vehicle speed and less severe collisions. A higher energy output to more severe injuries in a collision. The damage by themselves are not good indica- is used for more severe collisions. air bags work with your seat belt to tors of whether or not an air bag should have restrain you properly. In some collisions, deployed.

118 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags all collisions, and also are needed to help WARNING! (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the keep you in position, away from an inflating • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee front seats. The SABs are marked with a air bag. impact bolsters in any way. “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. When the ORC detects a collision requiring • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated occupant injury during certain side impacts, to inflate the front air bags. in addition to the injury reduction potential Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provided by the seat belts and body structure. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental separate and fold out of the way as the air Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru- bags inflate to their full size. The front air ment panel below the steering column. The bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides blink your eyes. The front air bags then enhanced protection during a frontal impact quickly deflate while helping to restrain the by working together with the seat belts, pre- driver and front passenger. tensioners, and front air bags. Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs) position the front occupants for improved This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental interaction with the front air bags. Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

119 When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- The SABIC deploys downward, covering the the outboard side of the seatback’s trim tains (SABICs) are located above the side side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the windows. The trim covering the SABICs is outside edge of the headliner out of the way seat seam into the space between the occu- labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” and covers the window. The SABICs inflate SAFETY pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very with enough force to injure occupants if they high speed and with such a high force that it are not belted and seated properly, or if items could injure occupants if they are not seated are positioned in the area where the SABICs properly, or if items are positioned in the area inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of where the SAB inflates. Children are at an injury from a deploying air bag. even greater risk of injury from a deploying air The SABICs may help reduce the risk of bag. partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- pants through side windows in certain side WARNING! impact events. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air WARNING! Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed • Do not mount equipment, or stack lug- gage or other cargo up high enough to into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable block the deployment of the SABICs. Curtain (SABIC) Label Location The trim covering above the side win- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and dows where the SABIC and its deploy- (SABICs) other injuries to front and rear seat outboard ment path are located should remain This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental occupants in certain side impacts, in addi- free from any obstructions. Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). tion to the injury reduction potential provided • In order for the SABICs to work as in- by the seat belts and body structure. tended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

120 indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags WARNING! should have deployed. WARNING! the roof. Do not add an aftermarket keep you in position, away from an in- sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side flating Side Air Bag. To get the best racks that require permanent attach- collisions, including some collisions at cer- protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- ments (bolts or screws) for installation tain angles, or some side collisions that do pants must wear their seat belts properly on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the not impact the area of the passenger com- and sit upright with their backs against roof of the vehicle for any reason. partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy the seats. Children must be properly during angled or offset frontal collisions restrained in a child restraint or booster where the front air bags deploy. Side Impacts seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in Controller (ORC) determines whether the de- less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING! ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do impact event is appropriate, based on the WARNING! not lean against the door or window. Sit severity and type of collision. The side impact • Occupants, including children, who are upright in the center of the seat. sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap- up against or very close to Side Air Bags • Being too close to the Side Air Bags propriate response to impact events. The sys- can be seriously injured or killed. Occu- during deployment could cause you to tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags pants, including children, should never be severely injured or killed. on the impact side of the vehicle during lean on or sleep against the door, side • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant windows, or area where the side air bags lead to more severe injuries in a colli- protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or sion. The Side Air Bags work with your deploy independently; a left side impact de- child restraint. seat belt to restrain you properly. In ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right- • Seat belts (and child restraints where some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags appropriate) are necessary for your pro- deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good tection in all collisions. They also help even though you have Side Air Bags.

121 NOTE: The SABICs may help reduce the risk of If A Deployment Occurs Air bag covers may not be obvious in the partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- The front air bags are designed to deflate interior trim, but they will open during air bag pants through side windows in certain roll- immediately after deployment. deployment. over or side impact events. SAFETY NOTE: Rollover Events Air Bag System Components Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in Side Air Bags are designed to activate in NOTE: all collisions. This does not mean something certain rollover events. The ORC determines The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is wrong with the air bag system. whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags monitors the internal circuits and intercon- If you do have a collision which deploys the in a particular rollover event is appropriate, necting wiring associated with electrical Air air bags, any or all of the following may occur: based on the severity and type of collision. Bag System Components listed below: • The air bag material may sometimes cause Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc- cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should • Air Bag Warning Light cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. have deployed. The abrasions are similar to friction rope • Steering Wheel and Column The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all burns or those you might get sliding along a • Instrument Panel rollover events. The rollover sensing system carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not determines if a rollover event may be in • Knee Impact Bolsters caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. progress and whether deployment is appro- • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags However, if you haven’t healed significantly priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a • Seat Belt Buckle Switch within a few days, or if you have any blis- rollover or near rollover event, and deploy- tering, see your doctor immediately. ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the • Supplemental Side Air Bags rollover sensing system will also deploy the • Supplemental Knee Air Bags • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the • Front and Side Impact Sensors normal by-product of the process that gen- vehicle. • Seat Belt Pretensioners erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

122 inflation. These airborne particles may irri- NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System Reset tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the Procedure have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area interior trim, but they will open during air with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re- bag deployment. move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, sponse System functions after an event, the see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be ignition switch must be changed from igni- your clothing, follow the garment manufac- taken to an authorized dealer immediately. tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care- turer’s instructions for cleaning. fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the Enhanced Accident Response System engine compartment and on the ground near Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags the engine compartment and fuel tank before have deployed. If you are involved in another In the event of an impact, if the communica- resetting the system and starting the engine. collision, the air bags will not be in place to tion network remains intact, and the power protect you. remains intact, depending on the nature of Maintaining Your Air Bag System the event, the ORC will determine whether to WARNING! have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- WARNING! tem perform the following functions: Deployed air bags and seat belt preten- • Modifications to any part of the air bag sioners cannot protect you in another • Cut off fuel to the engine. system could cause it to fail when you collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pre- • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery need it. You could be injured if the air tensioners, and the seat belt retractor as- has power or until the hazard light button is bag system is not there to protect you. semblies replaced by an authorized dealer pressed. The hazard lights can be deacti- Do not modify the components or wiring, immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re- vated by pressing the hazard light button. including adding any kind of badges or straint Controller System serviced as well. stickers to the steering wheel hub trim • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on cover or the upper right side of the as long as the battery has power. instrument panel. Do not modify the • Unlock the power door locks. front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

123 Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: WARNING! EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if This vehicle is equipped with an event data • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR the air bag system yourself. Be sure to are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

SAFETY is to record, in certain crash or near crash- tell anyone who works on your vehicle conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, like situations, such as an air bag deployment that it has an air bag system. gender, age, and crash location) are re- or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist • Do not attempt to modify any part of your corded. However, other parties, such as law in understanding how a vehicle’s systems air bag system. The air bag may inflate enforcement, could combine the EDR data performed. The EDR is designed to record accidentally or may not function prop- with the type of personally identifying data data related to vehicle dynamics and safety erly if modifications are made. Take your routinely acquired during a crash investiga- systems for a short period of time, typically vehicle to an authorized dealer for any tion. air bag system service. If your seat, in- 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is cluding your trim cover and cushion, designed to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the needs to be serviced in any way (includ- • How various systems in your vehicle were ing removal or loosening/tightening of operating; vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such • Whether or not the driver and passenger as law enforcement, that have the special to your authorized dealer. Only manufac- safety belts were buckled/fastened; turer approved seat accessories may be equipment, can read the information if they used. If it is necessary to modify the air • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing have access to the vehicle or the EDR. bag system for persons with disabilities, the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, contact your authorized dealer. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

124 Child Restraints Before buying any restraint system, make WARNING! sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled all applicable Safety Standards. You should up at all times, including babies and chil- In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The also make sure that you can install it in the dren. Every state in the United States, and vehicle where you will use it. every Canadian province, requires that small force required to hold even an infant on children ride in proper restraint systems. your lap could become so great that you NOTE: could not hold the child, no matter how This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for strong you are. The child and others could • For additional information, refer to ignoring it. be badly injured or killed. Any child riding www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or Children 12 years or younger should ride in your vehicle should be in a proper re- call: 1–888–327–4236 properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail- straint for the child’s size. • Canadian residents should refer to able. According to crash statistics, children Transport Canada’s website for additional are safer when properly restrained in the rear There are different sizes and types of re- information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ seats rather than in the front. straints for children from newborn size to the motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety- child almost large enough for an adult safety index-53.htm belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

125 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their SAFETY facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har- Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing ness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle seat belt Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Child Restraints the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints eight limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or WARNING! Safety experts recommend that children ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two • Never place a rear-facing child restraint child seats often have a higher weight limit in years old or until they reach either the height in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- or weight limit of their rear-facing child re- the rear-facing direction than infant carriers senger front air bag can cause death or straint. Two types of child restraints can be do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil- serious injury to a child 12 years or used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert- dren who have outgrown their infant carrier younger, including a child in a rear- ible child seats. but are still less than at least two years old. facing child restraint. Children should remain rear-facing until they • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in reach the highest weight or height allowed by vehicle with a rear seat. the vehicle. It is recommended for children their convertible child seat. from birth until they reach the weight or

126 Older Children And Child Restraints Children Too Large For Booster Seats WARNING! Children who are two years old or who have Children who are large enough to wear the outgrown their rear-facing convertible child • Improper installation can lead to failure shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. of an infant or child restraint. It could long enough to bend over the front of the seat come loose in a collision. The child Forward-facing child seats and convertible when their back is against the seatback, could be badly injured or killed. Follow child seats used in the forward-facing direction should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use the child restraint manufacturer’s direc- are for children who are over two years old or this simple 5-step test to decide whether the tions exactly when installing an infant or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: child restraint. height limit of their rear-facing convertible • After a child restraint is installed in the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against child seat. Children should remain in a vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat the back of the vehicle seat? forward-facing child seat with a harness for as forward or rearward because it can 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably long as possible, up to the highest weight or loosen the child restraint attachments. over the front of the vehicle seat – while height allowed by the child seat. Remove the child restraint before ad- the child is still sitting all the way back? All children whose weight or height is above justing the vehicle seat position. When 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the forward-facing limit for the child seat the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re- shoulder between their neck and arm? install the child restraint. should use a belt-positioning booster seat • When your child restraint is not in use, 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt possible, touching the child’s thighs and the child cannot sit with knees bent over the or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from not the stomach? vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the is against the seatback, they should use a vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it whole trip? belt-positioning booster seat. The child and could strike the occupants or seatbacks belt-positioning booster seat are held in the and cause serious personal injury. If the answer to any of these questions was vehicle by the seat belt. “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt

127 fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or WARNING! WARNING! slouching can move the belt out of position. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt injury or death. A child must always wear If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, under an arm or behind their back. In a both the lap and shoulder portions of the SAFETY move the child closer to the center of the crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a seat belt correctly. vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the child properly, which may result in serious seat belt on the child correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchors Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) XX Restraint Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Child Restraint Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg)

128 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- LATCH Positions For Installing Child (LATCH) Restraint System equipped child seats. There are two lower Restraints In This Vehicle anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seat- ing position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the LATCH Label top tether anchorage to install the child re- straint. Please see the following table for Your vehicle is equipped with the child re- LATCH Positions For Installing Child more information. straint anchorage system called LATCH, Restraints In This Vehicle which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers Lower Anchorage Symbol for CHildren. The LATCH system has three (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of attach the child restraint? the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

129 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used forward-facing child restraint.

SAFETY together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages restraint? if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center position using Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat No the inner LATCH lower anchorages? in the center seating position. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated Can two child restraints be attached using a common No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a lower LATCH anchorage? child seat in the center position next to a child seat us- ing the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con- Yes front passenger seat? tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. The head restraint may be removed in the center seating Can the head restraints be removed? Yes position only.

130 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind each strap will have a hook at the end to attach to found at the rear of the seat cushion where it rear seating position located on the back of the the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten meets the seatback, below the anchorage seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. symbols on the seatback. They are just visible panel away from the seat back, this will expose when you lean into the rear seat to install the the top tether strap anchorages. Center Seat LATCH child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the WARNING! seatback and seat cushion. • Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for install- ing child seats using the LATCH attach- ments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. • Never use the same lower anchorage to Tether Strap Anchorages attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A LATCH- LATCH-compatible child restraint systems Compatible Child Restraint” for typical LATCH Anchorages will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible installation instructions. strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

131 Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether 2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint the plastic seat backing. For rear-facing child restraints secured in the If the selected seating position has a Switch- center seat position with the vehicle seat 3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat

SAFETY belts, the rear center seat position has an hook to the strap located on the front of belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc- armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the arm rest. tions below. See the section “Installing Child the upward position. Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating 1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, position has. first lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so onto the plastic seat backing. that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether rear-most position to make room for the Always follow the directions of the child re- child seat. You may also move the front straint manufacturer when installing your seat forward to allow more room for the child restraint. Not all child restraint systems child seat. will be installed as described here. Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

132 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR the child restraint to the lower anchorages (ALR) Seat Belt: WARNING! in the selected seating position. When using the LATCH attaching system to • Improper installation of a child restraint 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat to the LATCH anchorages can lead to connect it to the top tether anchorage. belts that are not being used by other occu- failure of the restraint. The child could See the section “Installing Child Re- pants or being used to secure child restraints. be badly injured or killed. Follow the straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” An unused belt could injure a child if they child restraint manufacturer’s directions for directions to attach a tether anchor. play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the retractor. Before installing a child restraint • Child restraint anchorages are designed child restraint rearward and downward using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt to withstand only those loads imposed by into the seat. Remove slack in the straps behind the child restraint and out of the correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no according to the child restraint manufac- child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter- circumstances are they to be used for turer’s instructions. feres with the child restraint installation, in- stead of buckling it behind the child re- adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach- 6. Test that the child restraint is installed straint, route the seat belt through the child ing other items or equipment to the ve- tightly by pulling back and forth on the restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not hicle. child seat at the belt path. It should not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and direction. that they should not play with them.

133 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Seat Belt tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- Child Restraints In This Vehicle matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de- Child restraint systems are designed to be signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt

SAFETY secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the tight around the child restraint so that it is lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked WARNING! mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the • Improper installation or failure to prop- retractor and then letting the webbing retract erly secure a child restraint can lead to back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR failure of the restraint. The child could will make a clicking noise while the webbing be badly injured or killed. is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the • Follow the child restraint manufactur- “Automatic Locking Mode” description in Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) er’s directions exactly when installing an “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors Locations infant or child restraint. (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Please see the table below and the following Top Tether Anchorage Symbol sections for more information. Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the Weight limit of the Child Restraint belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of Yes child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manu- the front passenger seat? facturer also allows contact.

134 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts The head restraint may be removed in the center Can the head restraints be removed? Yes seating position only. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position No belt against the belt path of the child restraint? with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): seating position. For some second row shoulder part of the belt until you have seats, you may need to recline the seat pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Child restraint systems are designed to be and/or raise the head restraint to get a retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re- secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap better fit. If the rear seat can be moved tract back into the retractor. As the web- belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you bing retracts, you will hear a clicking may wish to move it to its rear-most posi- sound. This means the seat belt is now in WARNING! tion to make room for the child seat. You the Automatic Locking mode. • Improper installation or failure to prop- may also move the front seat forward to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. erly secure a child restraint can lead to allow more room for the child seat. If it is locked, you should not be able to failure of the restraint. The child could 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not be badly injured or killed. the retractor to pass it through the belt locked, repeat step 5. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s path of the child restraint. Do not twist the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to directions exactly when installing an in- belt webbing in the belt path. tighten the lap portion around the child fant or child restraint. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until restraint while you push the child restraint you hear a “click.” rearward and downward into the vehicle 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap seat. portion tight against the child seat.

135 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap 2. To access the top tether strap anchorages and the seating position has a top tether WARNING! behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage that is approved for that seating panel away from the seat back, this will anchorage and tighten the tether strap. position, located behind the top of the expose the top tether strap anchorages. SAFETY See the section “Installing Child Re- vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An- chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” Restraint System” for the location of ap- for directions to attach a tether anchor. proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if Top Tether Strap Anchorage necessary. (Located On Seatback) Installing Child Restraints Using The Top 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most Tether Anchorage: 1. Look behind the seating position where direct path for the strap between the an- you plan to install the child restraint to chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is find the tether anchorage. You may need WARNING! equipped with adjustable rear head re- to move the seat forward to provide better Do not attach a tether strap for a rear- access to the tether anchorage. If there is straints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap un- facing car seat to any location in front of no top tether anchorage for that seating der the head restraint and between the the car seat, including the seat frame or a position, move the child restraint to an- two posts. If not possible, lower the head tether anchorage. Only attach the tether other position in the vehicle if one is restraint and pass the tether strap around strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether available. the outboard side of the head restraint. 136 4. For the center seating position, route the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in tether strap over the seatback and head- WARNING! pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured rest then attach the hook to the tether • The top tether anchorages are not visible by seat belts. anchor located on the back of the seat. until the gap panel is folded down. Do 5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child not use the visible cargo tie down hooks, SAFETY TIPS located on the floor behind the seats, to restraint to the top tether anchorage as Transporting Passengers shown in the diagram. attach a child restraint tether anchor. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE could lead to increased head motion and CARGO AREA. possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the WARNING! child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • Do not leave children or animals inside • If your vehicle is equipped with a split parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior rear seat, make sure the tether strap heat build-up may cause serious injury does not slip into the opening between or death. the seatbacks as you remove slack in the • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a strap. cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these Transporting Pets areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could • Do not allow people to ride in any area of Top Tether Strap Mounting harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be your vehicle that is not equipped with 6. Remove slack in the tether strap accord- thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a seats and seat belts. ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s passenger during panic braking or in a colli- • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a instructions. sion. seat and using a seat belt properly.

137 Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced entry into the vehicle body is a properly after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies WARNING! maintained engine exhaust system. must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- SAFETY Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con- Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col- the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can seat belt or retractor condition, replace the orless and odorless. Breathing it can make be detected inside the vehicle, or when the seat belt. you unconscious and can eventually poi- underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light these safety tips: plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar- The Air Bag warning light will turn on for • Do not run the engine in a closed garage eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or four to eight seconds as a bulb check when or in confined areas any longer than mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. needed to move your vehicle in or out of connections could permit exhaust fumes to If the light is either not on during starting, the area. seep into the passenger compartment. In stays on, or turns on while driving, have the • If you are required to drive with the addition, inspect the exhaust system each system inspected at your authorized dealer as trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil soon as possible. After the bulb check, this sure that all windows are closed and the change. Replace as required. light will illuminate with a single chime when climate control BLOWER switch is set at a fault with the Air Bag System has been high speed. DO NOT use the recircula- Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside detected. It will stay on until the fault is tion mode. The Vehicle cleared. If the light comes on intermittently • If it is necessary to sit in a parked or remains on while driving, have your autho- vehicle with the engine running, adjust Seat Belts rized dealer service the vehicle immediately. your heating or cooling controls to force Inspect the seat belt system periodically, Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in outside air into the vehicle. Set the checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Dam- “Safety” for further information. blower at high speed. aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

138 Defroster WARNING! WARNING! Check operation by selecting the defrost clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle the accelerator, the brake, and the mode and place the blower control on high control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or clutch pedal (if present) to check for speed. You should be able to feel the air DEATH: interference. If your floor mat interferes directed against the windshield. See your • ALWAYS securely attach your floor with the operation of any pedal, or is not authorized dealer for service if your defroster mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO secure to the floor, remove the floor mat is inoperable. NOT install your floor mat upside down from the vehicle and place the floor mat or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to in your trunk. Floor Mat Safety Information confirm mat is secured using the floor • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat Always use floor mats designed to fit your mat fasteners on a regular basis. on the passenger’s side floor area. vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or interfere with the operation of the accelera- FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE slide into the driver’s side floor area tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor before installing any other floor mat. when the vehicle is moving. Objects can mat that is securely attached using the floor NEVER install or stack an additional become trapped under accelerator, mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. brake, or clutch pedals and could cause • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit a loss of vehicle control. and interfere with the accelerator, brake or your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat • NEVER place any objects under the floor clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your that cannot be properly attached and mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob- vehicle in other ways. secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat jects could change the position of the needs to be replaced, only use a FCA floor mat and may cause interference WARNING! approved floor mat for the specific with the accelerator, brake, or clutch make, model, and year of your vehicle. pedals. An improperly attached, damaged, folded, • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on • If the vehicle carpet has been removed or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to in- the driver’s side floor area. To check for and re-installed, always properly attach terfere with the accelerator, brake, or interference, with the vehicle properly carpet to the floor and check the floor parked with the engine off, fully depress mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle

139 Lights WARNING! WARNING! carpet. Fully depress each pedal to Have someone observe the operation of brake • The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is check for interference with the accelera- lights and exterior lights while you work the for race vehicles on race tracks. To help

SAFETY tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re- controls. Check turn signal and high beam ensure the safety of the race driver, install the floor mats. indicator lights on the instrument panel. engineers should supervise the installa- • It is recommended to only use mild soap Door Latches tion of “Track-Use” parts. and water to clean your floor mats. After • FCA US LLC does not authorize the cleaning, always check your floor mat Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. installation or use of any part noted as has been properly installed and is se- Fluid Leaks “Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to cured to your vehicle using the floor mat its first retail sale. fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or WARNING! Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Make if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Outside The Vehicle cause should be located and corrected • ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip- immediately. ment before driving on public roads. Tires • ALWAYS properly use your three-point WARNING! Examine tires for excessive tread wear and seat belts when driving on public roads. • In a collision, you and your passengers uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH can suffer much greater injuries if you nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the when using “Track-Use” parts and equip- are not properly buckled up. You can tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts ment: strike the interior of your vehicle or other and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, • NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment passengers, or you can be thrown out of cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for on public roads. FCA US LLC does not the vehicle. tightness. Check the tires (including spare) authorize the use of “Track-Use” equip- for proper cold inflation pressure. ment on public roads.

140 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE — AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .148 SELEC-TERRAIN — GAS...... 143 Ignition Park Interlock ...... 150 IF EQUIPPED ...... 162 Automatic Transmission ...... 143 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...... 162 Normal Starting ...... 143 System ...... 150 Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .163 STARTING THE ENGINE — Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ...... 150 SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 144 Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . .151 (SRT)...... 163 Automatic Transmission ...... 145 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . .153 Custom ...... 163 Normal Starting ...... 145 Active Damping System ...... 164 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Launch Control — If Equipped ...... 164 STOP/START SYSTEM — OPERATION...... 153 IFEQUIPPED...... 146 Guidelines For Track Use ...... 165 Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/ Automatic Mode ...... 146 Precautions — If Equipped ...... 153 SPEED CONTROL...... 167 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/ Activation ...... 167 Autostop ...... 147 Precautions — If Equipped ...... 153 Setting A Desired Speed ...... 168 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Shift Positions ...... 154 Varying The Speed ...... 168 Mode ...... 147 Shifting Procedures ...... 155 Resume Speed ...... 169 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start Accelerating For Passing ...... 169 System ...... 148 Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped . .157 Deactivation ...... 169 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED . . .157 System ...... 148 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Description ...... 157 System Malfunction ...... 148 (ACC)...... 169 Air Suspension Modes ...... 160 Activation ...... 170 Instrument Cluster Display Messages . .160 Setting A Desired Speed ...... 170 Operation ...... 160 141 Varying The Speed ...... 170 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer To Resume ...... 171 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 177 Weight Ratings) — Diesel ...... 189 Deactivation ...... 172 LANESENSE...... 179 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT ...... 190 Setting The Following Distance ...... 172 LaneSense Operation ...... 179 ACC Operation At Stop ...... 172 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 179 (Summit Models) — If Equipped.....191 Changing Modes ...... 173 PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal General Information...... 174 CAMERA...... 180 (SRT Models) — If Equipped ...... 192 PARKSENSE REAR PARK Symbols And Messages On The RECREATIONAL TOWING ASSIST...... 174 Display ...... 180 (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .194 ParkSense Sensors ...... 174 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Activation/Deactivation ParkSense . . . .174 GASOLINEENGINE...... 180 Vehicle ...... 194 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 175 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . .182 Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive

STARTING AND OPERATING ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .175 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — Models ...... 195 PARKSENSE FRONT AND DIESEL ENGINE ...... 183 Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I REARPARKASSIST...... 176 Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel .....184 (Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models ...... 195 ParkSense Sensors ...... 176 Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel . . . .185 Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac Diesel Exhaust Fluid ...... 185 Activation/Deactivation ...... 177 II/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Engagement/Disengagement ...... 177 TRAILER TOWING ...... 188 Models ...... 195 Operation With A Trailer ...... 177 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer General Warnings ...... 177 Weight Ratings) — Non SRT ...... 188

142 STARTING THE ENGINE — WARNING! CAUTION! GAS children, and do not leave the ignition of • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- has come to a complete stop. adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after your seat belt, and if present, instruct all child could operate power windows, the vehicle has come to a complete stop other occupants to buckle their seat belts. other controls, or move the vehicle. and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not leave children or animals inside • Before shifting into any gear, make sure parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. WARNING! heat build-up may cause serious injury • Before exiting a vehicle, always come to or death. Normal Starting a complete stop, then shift the auto- Automatic Transmission To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ matic transmission into PARK and apply STOP Button the parking brake. Always make sure the The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or 1. The transmission must be in PARK or keyless ignition node is in the OFF PARK position before you can start the en- NEUTRAL. mode, remove the key fob from the ve- gine. Apply the brakes before shifting into hicle and lock the vehicle. any driving gear. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button or with access to an unlocked vehicle. once. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended CAUTION! 3. The system takes over and attempts to is dangerous for a number of reasons. A Damage to the transmission may occur if start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to child or others could be seriously or the following precautions are not ob- fatally injured. Children should be served: start, the starter will disengage automati- warned not to touch the parking brake, • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or cally after 10 seconds. brake pedal or the gear selector. NEUTRAL into any forward gear when 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the the engine is above idle speed. engine prior to the engine starting, push vehicle, or in a location accessible to the button again. 143 NOTE: 5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button Normal starting of either a cold or a warm (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP but- once to place the ignition to the ACC mode engine is obtained without pumping or press- ton must be held for two seconds (or three (instrument cluster will display “ACC”), ing the accelerator pedal. short pushes in a row) to turn the engine • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE off. The ignition will remain in the ACC second time to place the ignition to the START/STOP Button mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is RUN mode (instrument cluster will display turned off when the transmission is not in 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push “ON/RUN”), PARK. and release the ENGINE START/STOP • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a button. NOTE: third time to return the ignition to the OFF 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. The system will automatically time out and mode (instrument cluster will display the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after “OFF”). 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/ in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode STARTING THE ENGINE — STOP button is pushed once, the trans-

STARTING AND OPERATING and the transmission is in PARK. mission will automatically select PARK 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE and the engine will turn off, however the ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, ignition will remain in the ACC mode Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a ve- NEUTRAL Position) hicle out of the PARK position, or it could your seat belts. The ENGINE START/STOP button operates roll. The starter is allowed to crank for up to similar to an ignition switch. It has three 4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the 30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), between such intervals will protect the starter ignition modes without starting the vehicle pushing the START/STOP button once will from overheating. and use the accessories, follow these steps: turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode. • Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,

144 WARNING! WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not leave children or animals inside • Before exiting a vehicle, always come to Diesel Supplement on www.mopar.com/ parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior a complete stop, then shift the auto- en-us/care/owner-manual.html U.S. Resi- heat build-up may cause serious injury matic transmission into PARK and apply dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- or death. the parking brake. Always make sure the dian Residents) for further information. keyless ignition node is in the OFF NOTE: mode, remove the key fob from the ve- Automatic Transmission Engine start up in very low ambient tempera- hicle and lock the vehicle. Start the engine with the transmission gear • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, ture could result in evident white smoke. This condition will disappear as the engine warms selector in the PARK position. Apply the or with access to an unlocked vehicle. brake before shifting to any driving range. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended up. is dangerous for a number of reasons. A Normal Starting child or others could be seriously or CAUTION! fatally injured. Children should be Observe the instrument panel cluster lights warned not to touch the parking brake, • The engine is allowed to crank as long as when starting the engine. 30 seconds. If the engine fails to start brake pedal or the gear selector. NOTE: • Do not leave the key fob in or near the during this period, please wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool before Normal starting of either a cold or a warm vehicle, or in a location accessible to engine is obtained without pumping or press- children, and do not leave the ignition of repeating start procedure. ing the accelerator pedal a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- • If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A remains on, DO NOT START engine be- 1. Always apply the parking brake. fore you drain the water from the fuel child could operate power windows, 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while other controls, or move the vehicle. filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your once.

145 NOTE: 5. Check that the oil pressure warning light To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following A delay of the start of up to five seconds is has turned off. Must Occur: possible under very cold conditions. The 6. Release the parking brake. • The system must be in STOP/START "Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminated READY state. A STOP/START READY mes- during the pre-heat process, When the sage will be displayed in the instrument engine Wait To Start light goes off the STOP/START SYSTEM — cluster display within the Stop/Start sec- engine will automatically crank. IF EQUIPPED tion. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Get- CAUTION! The Stop/Start function is developed to re- ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in duce fuel consumption. The system will stop your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re- the engine automatically during a vehicle en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- mains on, DO NOT START engine before stop if the required conditions are met. Re- dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian you drain the water from the fuel filters leasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel- Residents) for further information. to avoid engine damage. Refer to “Drain- erator pedal will automatically re-start the • The vehicle must be completely stopped. ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Ser- engine.

STARTING AND OPERATING vicing And Maintenance” in your Die- • The shifter must be in a forward gear and sel Supplement at www.mopar.com/en-us/ Automatic Mode the brake pedal depressed. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) The Stop/Start feature is enabled The engine will shut down, the tachometer or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- after every normal customer en- will move to the zero position and the Stop/ dents) for further information. gine start. At that time, the sys- Start telltale will illuminate indicating you tem will go into STOP/START are in Autostop. Customer settings will be 3. The system will automatically engage the READY and if all other condi- maintained upon return to an engine running starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle tions are met, can go into a STOP/START condition. fails to start, the starter will disengage AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode. automatically after 25 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

146 Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Start- • HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high ToStart The Engine While In Autostop ing And Operating” section located in your blower speed. Mode Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ • HVAC set to MAX A/C. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or While in a forward gear, the engine will start www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) • Engine has not reached normal operating when the brake pedal is released or the temperature. for further information. throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission • The transmission is not in a forward gear. will automatically re-engage upon engine re- Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not start. • Hood is open. Autostop • Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Prior to engine shut down, the system will Automatically While In Autostop Mode: • Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient check many safety and comfort conditions to pressure. • The transmission selector is moved out of see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information DRIVE. about the operation of the Stop/Start system Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop • To maintain cabin temperature comfort. may be viewed in the instrument cluster dis- Include: play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ- • Accelerator pedal input. • HVAC is set to full defrost mode. ations, the engine will not stop: • Engine temp too high. • HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted. • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. • 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previ- • Driver’s door is not closed. ous AUTOSTOP. • Battery voltage drops too low. • Battery temperature is too warm or cold. • Steering angle beyond threshold. • Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications). • Battery charge is low. • ACC is on and speed is set. • STOP/START OFF switch is pushed. • The vehicle is on a steep grade. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START sys- • A STOP/START system error occurs. • Cabin heating or cooling is in process and tem going into a STOP/START READY state an acceptable cabin temperature has not • 4WD system is put into 4LO mode. under more extreme conditions of the items been achieved. listed above. 147 ToManually TurnOff The Stop/Start Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s System Malfunction System Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or system, the system will not shut down the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” dents) for further information. message will appear in the instrument cluster 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- the STOP/START system), the engine will play“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument not be stopped. Panel” for further information. 4. The STOP/START system will reset itself If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” back to an ON condition every time the message appears in the instrument cluster ignition is turned off and back on. display, have the system checked by your authorized dealer. ToManually TurnOn The Stop/Start

STARTING AND OPERATING System AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will WARNING! STOP/START Off Switch turn off. • Never use the PARK position as a substi- 1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located For complete details on the Stop/Start tute for the parking brake. Always apply on the switch bank). The light on the switch System refer to the “Stop/Start System” the parking brake fully when exiting the will illuminate. in the “Starting And Operating” section vehicle to guard against vehicle move- ment and possible injury or damage. 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap- located in your Owners Manual at • Your vehicle could move and injure you pear in instrument cluster display within www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html and others if it is not in PARK. Check the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instru- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca by trying to move the transmission gear ment Cluster” in “Getting To Know (Canadian Residents) for further information. selector out of PARK with the brake

148 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! pedal released. Make sure the transmis- • Unintended movement of a vehicle • Do not leave the key fob in or near the sion is in PARK before exiting the ve- could injure those in or near the vehicle. vehicle (or in a location accessible to hicle. As with all vehicles, you should never children), and do not leave the ignition • The transmission may not engage PARK exit a vehicle while the engine is run- in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always could operate power windows, other vehicle to a complete stop before shift- come to a complete stop, then apply the controls, or move the vehicle. ing to PARK, and verify that the trans- parking brake, shift the transmission mission gear position indicator solidly into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. CAUTION! indicates PARK (P) without blinking. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, Ensure that the vehicle is completely the transmission is locked in PARK, se- Damage to the transmission may occur if stopped, and the PARK position is prop- curing the vehicle against unwanted the following precautions are not ob- erly indicated, before exiting the ve- movement. served: hicle. • When exiting the vehicle, always make • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, only after the vehicle has come to a NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher remove the key fob from the vehicle, and complete stop. than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly lock the vehicle. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is could accelerate quickly forward or in or with access to an unlocked vehicle. above idle speed. reverse. You could lose control of the Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- • Before shifting into any gear, make sure vehicle and hit someone or something. attended is dangerous for a number of your foot is firmly pressing the brake Only shift into gear when the engine is reasons. A child or others could be seri- pedal. idling normally and your foot is firmly ously or fatally injured. Children should pressing the brake pedal. be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: brake, brake pedal or the transmission You must press and hold the brake pedal gear selector. while shifting out of PARK.

149 Ignition Park Interlock Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is en- gaged, the vehicle control systems will This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve change the following: Interlock which requires the transmission to the vehicle's overall fuel economy during nor- be in PARK before the ignition can be turned mal driving conditions. Push the “ECO” • The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later. to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid switch in the center stack of the instrument inadvertently leaving the vehicle without panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A • The overall driving performance will be placing the transmission in PARK. This sys- light on the switch indicates when ECO mode more conservative. tem also locks the transmission in PARK is disabled (for regular models) or enabled • Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. (for SRT models). will operate in "Aero" mode over a broader NOTE: speed range. Refer to the section on The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when Quadra-Lift for further information. the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though • In SRT models, the transmission will the engine will be off). Ensure that the trans- launch (from a stop) in second gear, and

STARTING AND OPERATING mission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF the torque converter clutch may engage at (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle. lower engine speeds and remain on longer. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System • Some ECO mode functions may be tempo- rarily inhibited based on temperature and This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans- other factors. mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise be running and the brake pedal must be Cancellation System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to pressed. The brake pedal must also be ECO Switch pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or detect undesirable exhaust noise, which REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or sometimes occurs when operating in ECO moving at low speeds. 150 mode. An onboard frequency generator cre- The transmission gear selector provides AutoStick ates counteracting sound waves through the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet. MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) shift posi- feature providing manual shift control, giving tions. Manual shifts can be made using the you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear se- allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi- lector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position (be- 8 speed transmission. The gear selector is and improve overall vehicle performance. side the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift located in the center console. This system can also provide you with more paddles (+/-), if equipped, will manually se- control during passing, city driving, cold slip- lect the transmission gear, and will display pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer the current gear in the instrument cluster. towing, and many other situations. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information. NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis- Shift Paddles sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the Operation instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear Transmission Gear Selector access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. selector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap 1 — Lock Button one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel 2 — Transmission Gear Selector (if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle

151 (if equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will engine lugging or overspeed condition would • Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if downshift the transmission to the next lower result. It will remain in the selected gear until equipped), or holding the gear selector in gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick another upshift or downshift is chosen, ex- the (-) position, will downshift the trans- mode will retain the current gear. The current cept as described below. mission to the lowest gear possible at the transmission gear will be displayed in the current speed. • The transmission will automatically down- instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine • Transmission shifting will be more notice- can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL or able when AutoStick is enabled. SPORT position), or the shift paddles (if lugging) and will display the current gear. • The system may revert to automatic shift equipped), to manually shift the transmis- • The transmission will automatically down- mode if a fault or overheat condition is sion. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) shift to first gear when coming to a stop. detected. while in the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S) After a stop, the driver should manually position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle (if upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle NOTE: equipped), will downshift the transmission to is accelerated. When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is the next lower gear. Tapping the selector enabled, AutoStick is not active. • You can start out, from a stop, in first or

STARTING AND OPERATING rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle, second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range, To disengage AutoStick, return the gear se- if equipped) will command an upshift. Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) lector to the DRIVE position, or press and NOTE: (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and The shift paddles may be disabled (or re- Starting out in second or third gear can be the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Per- helpful in snowy or icy conditions. "D" is once again indicated in the instrument sonal Settings or, in SRT models, using Drive cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick at • If a requested downshift would cause the Modes. any time without taking your foot off the engine to over-speed, that shift will not accelerator pedal. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will occur. shift up or down when (+/-) is manually se- • The system will ignore attempts to upshift lected by the driver (using the gear selector, at too low of a vehicle speed. or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an

152 Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode NOTE: WARNING! feature. This mode is a configuration set up The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate Do not downshift for additional engine for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, for conditions where 4WD LOW range is rec- braking on a slippery surface. The drive transmission, and steering systems are all set ommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” wheels could lose their grip and the ve- to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- hicle could skid, causing a collision or provide improved throttle response and modi- mation. personal injury. fied shifting for an enhanced driving experi- Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/ ence, as well the greatest amount of steering Precautions — If Equipped SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED feel. This mode may be activated and deac- tivated by pushing the Sport button on the The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully au- instrument panel switch bank. tomatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case pro- FOUR WHEEL DRIVE vides three mode positions: OPERATION • 4WD HI • NEUTRAL Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/ • 4WD LOW Precautions — If Equipped This transfer case is fully automatic in the The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range 4WD HI mode. only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction When additional traction is required, the is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force System, which combines standard ABS and the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same Traction Control, provides resistance to any speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for Sport Mode Button wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.

153 loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in NEUTRAL the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced WARNING! This range disengages the driveline from the roads may cause increased tire wear and without first fully engaging the parking powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing damage to driveline components. brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi- tion disengages both the front and rear behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recre- When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, drive shafts from the powertrain and will ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” the engine speed is approximately three allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans- for further information. times that of the 4WD HI position at a given mission is in PARK. The parking brake road speed. Take care not to overspeed the should always be applied when the driver WARNING! engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). is not in the vehicle. You or others could be injured or killed if Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles Shift Positions you leave the vehicle unattended with the depends on tires of equal size, type, and transfer case in the NEUTRAL position circumference on each wheel. Any difference For additional information on the appropriate without first fully engaging the parking will adversely affect shifting and cause dam- use of each 4WD system mode position, see brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi- STARTING AND OPERATING age to the transfer case. the information below: tion disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will Because four-wheel drive provides improved 4WD AUTO allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans- traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe mission is in PARK. The parking brake This range is used on surfaces such as ice, turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster should always be applied when the driver snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement. than road conditions permit. is not in the vehicle. NOTE: WARNING! Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” fur- ther on in this section for further information You or others could be injured or killed if on the various positions and their intended you leave the vehicle unattended with the usages. transfer case in the NEUTRAL position

154 4WD LOW mission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It switch. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the provides an additional gear reduction which instrument cluster will flash and go out when allows for increased torque to be delivered to the shift is complete. both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery NOTE: road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph • If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or (40 km/h). a transfer case motor temperature protec- NOTE: tion condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N push Transfer Case Switch further information on the various positions 4 Low” message will flash from the instru- ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument and their intended usages. NOTE: Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a Shifting Procedures Instrument Panel” for further information. transfer case motor temperature protection 4WD HI To 4WD LOW condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below • Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press with the vehicle completely stopped; how- With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 4 Low” message will flash from the instru- ever, difficulty may occur due to the mating 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi- ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument clutch teeth not being properly aligned. tion or the engine running, shift the transmis- Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Several attempts may be required for sion into “N”, and push the “4WD LOW” Instrument Panel” for further information. clutch teeth alignment and shift comple- button once on the transfer case switch. The tion to occur. The preferred method is with 4WD LOW To 4WD HI “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph when the shift is complete. 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON posi- (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the tion or the engine running, shift the trans- shift.

155 Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, 6. After the shift is completed and the NEU- push and hold the recessed transfer case TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU- WARNING! NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se- TRAL (N) button. lector switch) for four seconds. The light 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. You or others could be injured or killed if behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will you leave the vehicle unattended with the blink, indicating shift in progress. The 8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position light will stop blinking (stay on solid) and ensure that there is no vehicle without first fully engaging the parking when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is com- movement. brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen- gages both the front and rear drive shafts plete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appear 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the from the powertrain and will allow the in the instrument cluster display. Refer to transmission back into NEUTRAL. “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is 10. Firmly apply the parking brake. in PARK. The parking brake should always To Know Your Instrument Panel” for fur- be applied when the driver is not in the ther information. 11. With the transmission and transfer case vehicle. in NEUTRAL, push and hold the EN- STARTING AND OPERATING GINE START/STOP button until the en- 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with gine turns off. the engine running. 12. Place the transmission gear selector in 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. PARK. Release the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button twice (without pressing the brake pedal), 4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to to turn the ignition to the OFF mode. Normal Ride Height. 14. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely attached to a tow NEUTRAL (N) Switch vehicle.

156 NOTE: the unit functions as a standard axle, balanc- If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a ing torque evenly between left and right “To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift wheels. With a traction difference between Procedure in Owner’s Manual” message will left and right wheels, the coupling will sense flash from the instrument cluster display. a speed difference. As one wheel begins to Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in spin faster than the other, torque will auto- “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for matically transfer from the wheel that has further information. less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) differ in design, their operation is similar. Use the following procedure to prepare your Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shift- NEUTRAL (N) Switch vehicle for normal usage. ing information, preceding this section, for shifting this system. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been 3. Start the engine. released, the transfer case will shift to the Description 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. position indicated by the selector switch. The Quadra-Lift air suspension system pro- 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped vides full time load leveling capability along 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment The optional Quadra-Drive II System features push and hold the recessed transfer case by the push of a button. The vehicle will two torque transfer couplings. The couplings NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se- automatically raise and lower the ride height include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differen- to adapt to the appropriate driving condi- lector switch) for one second. tial (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II tions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lower transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully to an aerodynamic ride height and when op- automatic and requires no driver input to erating in off-road modes, the vehicle will operate. Under normal driving conditions, raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons 157 near the terrain switch in the center console • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan- OR1 position while vehicle speed is below area can be used to set preferred ride height dard position of the suspension and is 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the to match the appropriate conditions. meant for normal driving. vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) • Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi- the vehicle height will be automatically mately 1.1 inches (28 mm) – This is the lowered to OR1. Refer to “Driving Tips” primary position for all off-road driving until in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s OR2 is needed. A smoother and more com- Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ fortable ride will result. Push the “UP” but- owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or ton once from the NRH position while the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). dents) for further information. When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) 0.6 inches (15 mm) – This position provides and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than improved aerodynamics by lowering the ve- 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds

STARTING AND OPERATING hicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Selec-Terrain Switch 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains automatically lowered to NRH. Refer to 1 — UP Button between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph 2 — DOWN Button “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” in (90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if 3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ (Customer Selectable) en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/ 4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Lamp (Customer Selectable) Residents) for further information. Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) • Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi- (Customer Selectable) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle mately 2.2 inches (55 mm) – This position is 6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The intended for off-roading use only where (Customer Selectable) maximum ground clearance is required. vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless of To enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT” from the NRH position or once from the mode. 158 • Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi- and the vehicle level should be either in The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the lowers the vehicle for easier passenger en- automatically lower if the air suspension level headlights from incorrectly shining into on- try and exit as well as lowering the rear of is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the the vehicle for easier loading and unloading equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), rear of the vehicle will move up first and then of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the the lowering will be suppressed when the the front. When lowering the vehicle, the “DOWN” button once from (NRH) while the ignition is switched OFF and the door is open front will move down first and then the rear. vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). to prevent setting the alarm off. After the engine is turned off, it may be Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph noticed that the air suspension system oper- The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to ates briefly, this is normal. The system is change the vehicle to the proper height based lower. If the vehicle speed remains between correcting the position of the vehicle to en- on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) sure a proper appearance. The height can be changed from the default for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle To assist with changing a spare tire, the speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a fea- Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled. suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain” ture which allows the automatic leveling to be To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in button once while in Entry/Exit Mode or mation. “Multimedia” for further information. drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). The system requires that the engine be run- NOTE: NOTE: ning for all changes. When lowering the ve- If equipped with a touch screen radio all Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/ hicle all of the doors, including the liftgate, enabling/disabling of air suspension features Exit Mode can be enabled through the must be closed. If a door is opened at any must be done through the radio. Refer to Uconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature time while the vehicle is lowering the change “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur- is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the will not be completed until the open door(s) is ther information. gear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switch closed. is in "AUTO", the transfer-case is in "AUTO”

159 ride height. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Wheel Alignment Mode WARNING! “Multimedia” for further information. Before performing a wheel alignment this mode The air suspension system uses a high NOTE: must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” pressure volume of air to operate the sys- This mode is intended to be enabled with in “Multimedia” for further information. tem. To avoid personal injury or damage to engine running. the system, see your authorized dealer for NOTE: service. Transport Mode This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Air Suspension Modes To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspen- sion system has a feature which will put the If equipped with a touch screen radio all The Air Suspension system has multiple modes vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to to protect the system in unique situations: automatic load leveling system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur- “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur- Tire/Jack Mode ther information. ther information. To assist with changing a spare tire, the air STARTING AND OPERATING Instrument Cluster Display Messages suspension system has a feature which allows NOTE: the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to This mode is intended to be enabled with When the appropriate conditions exist, a “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur- engine running. message will appear in the instrument clus- ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in ther information. Suspension Display Messages Mode “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for NOTE: The “Suspension Display Messages” setting further information. This mode is intended to be enabled with allows you to only display suspension warn- Operation engine running. ings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- Auto Entry/Exit Mode timedia” for further information. The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, NOTE: Flashing indicator lamps will show a position the air suspension system has a feature which This mode is intended to be enabled with which the system is working to achieve. When automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit engine running. raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing 160 on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indi- Automatic height changes will occur based Mode is achieved at which point indicator cator lamp is the position the system is working on vehicle speed and the current vehicle lamp 3 will go solid. If during the height to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indica- height. The indicator lamps and instrument change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle tors are flashing on the "Up" button the lowest cluster display messages will operate the speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the solid indicator lamp is the position the system same for automatic changes and user re- height change will be paused until the is working to achieve. quested changes. vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height change continues Pushing the “UP” button once will move the • Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph suspension one position higher from the cur- and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return rent position, assuming all conditions are is in OR2. to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected met (i.e. engine running, speed below thresh- • Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors old, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in remain closed. multiple times, each push will raise the re- OR1. quested level by one position up to a maxi- • Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator mum position of OR2 or the highest position illuminated. Customer driving will disable lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle allowed based on current conditions (i.e. ve- Transport Mode. is in this position. hicle speed, etc). • Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and • Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be 6 will be illuminated. Customer driving will Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/ disable Tire/Jack Mode. the suspension one position lower from the Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested • Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps current level, assuming all conditions are met while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driv- (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed be- (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator ing will disable Wheel Alignment Mode. low threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator be pressed multiple times. Each push will lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the lower the requested level by one position vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is down to a minimum of Park Mode or the reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph lowest position allowed based on current con- (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and ditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.) indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit 161 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF When in Snow mode (depending on certain • Mud – Off road calibration for use on low EQUIPPED operating conditions), the transmission traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is may use second gear (rather than first gear) maximized for traction. Some binding may Selec-Terrain Mode Selection during launches, to minimize wheel slip- be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The elec- page. If equipped with air suspension, the tronic brake controls are set to limit trac- Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of default ride height for Snow is Normal Ride tion control management of throttle and the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all Height (NRH). wheel spin. If equipped with air suspen- terrains. • Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel sion, the level will change to Off Road 1. drive operation can be used on and off road. • Rock – Off road calibration only available Balances traction with seamless steering in 4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (if feel to provide improved handling and ac- equipped with Air Suspension) for improved celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles. ground clearance. Traction based tuning with If equipped with air suspension, the level improved steer-ability for use on high trac-

STARTING AND OPERATING will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH). tion off-road surfaces. Use for low speed • Sand – Off road calibration for use on low obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle Driveline is maximized for traction. Some level will change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec- binding may be felt on less forgiving sur- Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to Selec-Terrain Switch faces. The electronic brake controls are set 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain system will re- to limit traction control management of turn to AUTO. Selec-Terrain consists of the following posi- throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with tions: air suspension, the default ride height for NOTE: • Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in Sand is Normal Ride Height (NRH). Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec inclement weather. Use on and off road Speed Control for steep downhill control. See on loose traction surfaces such as snow. “Electronic Brake Control System” in this section for further information. 162 Instrument Cluster Display Messages Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi- felt on less forgiving surfaces. This feature media” section in your Owner’s Manual at will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle. When the appropriate conditions exist, a www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Tow – Use this mode for towing and hauling message will appear in the instrument clus- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca heavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go to ter. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in (Canadian Residents) for further information. “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for sport mode. Trailer sway control is enabled further information. Selec-Track consists of the following positions: in the ESC system. This feature will reset to • Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. AUTO upon an ignition cycle. SELEC-TRACK — Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved Custom IF EQUIPPED (SRT) handling and acceleration over a two-wheel This mode allows the driver to create a cus- drive vehicle. This feature will reset to Description AUTO on an ignition cycle. tom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite settings. The sys- Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the • Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in tem will return to AUTO mode when the vehicle control systems, along with driver inclement weather. Use on and off road on ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to input, to provide the best performance for all loose traction surfaces such as snow. This RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Cus- terrains. feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition tom Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steer- cycle. Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the ing, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up, and desired mode. • Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel Paddle shifter settings may be configured drive operation can be used on and off road. through the custom mode set-up. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and ac- NOTE: celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles. Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi- media” section in your Owner’s Manual at • Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction surfaces. Driveline is maxi- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html mized for traction. Some binding may be (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca Selec-Track Switch (Canadian Residents) for further information.

163 Active Damping System Launch Control — If Equipped • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. This vehicle is equipped with an electronic This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Con- controlled damping system. This system re- trol system that is designed to allow the driver CAUTION! duces body roll and pitch in many driving to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a situations including cornering, acceleration straight line. Launch Control is a form of Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and and braking. There are 3 modes: traction control that manages tire slip while is not recommended. • Street Mode (Available in terrain positions launching the vehicle. This feature is in- AUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used dur- tended for use during race events on a closed Launch Control is only available when the ing highway speeds where a touring sus- course where consistent quarter mile and following procedure is followed: pension feel is desired. zero to sixty times are desired. The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver NOTE: • Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions experience or familiarity with the race track. Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Track AUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Pro- Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet, switch or pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are the two options to STARTING AND OPERATING vides a firm suspension for better handling. gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess access launch control features. Please refer to • Track Mode (Available in terrain positions wheel slip outside this systems control result- “SRT Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in your ing in an aborted launch. AUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ a full firm suspension for an aggressive Preconditions: care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or track experience. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) • Launch Control should not be used on pub- for further information. Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multi- lic roads. Always check track conditions media” section in your Owner’s Manual at and the surrounding area. 1. Press the “Race Options” button on the www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html touchscreen or push the LAUNCH button • Launch Control is not available within the on the Select-Track switch. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca first 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in. (Canadian Residents) for further information. 2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button • Launch Control should only be used when on the touchscreen. This screen will allow the engine and transmission are at operat- you to adjust your launch RPM’s for opti- ing temperature. mum launch/traction. 164 3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” but- Launch control will be active until the vehicle Guidelines For Track Use ton on the touchscreen, follow instruc- reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point tions in the instrument cluster display. the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encoun- will return to its current ESC mode. • Make sure the vehicle is not moving. tered during track use, any damage or wear • Put vehicle in first gear. Launch control will abort before launch associated with track use may not be covered completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the by warranty. • Steering wheel must be pointing straight. cluster under any the following conditions: • If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive • Vehicle must be on level ground. • The accelerator pedal is released during Modes they will alter the vehicle’s perfor- launch. mance in various driving situations. It is • Apply Brake Pressure. recommended that your vehicle operates in • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is • While holding the brake, rapidly apply SPORT or TRACK modes during the track no longer moving in a straight line. the accelerator pedal to wide open event. throttle. The engine speed will hold at • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change • Prior to each track event/day, verify all flu- the RPM that was set in the “Launch the system to another mode. ids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Technical Specifications” RPM Set-up” screen. NOTE: for further information. NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC • Prior to each track event, verify the front Messages will appear in the instrument clus- will return to its current ESC mode. and rear brake pads have more than ½ pad ter display to inform the driver if one or more CAUTION! thickness remaining. If the brake pads of the above conditions have not been met. require changing, please burnish prior to 4. When the above conditions have been Do not attempt to shift when the drive track outing at full pace. met, the instrument cluster display will wheels are spinning and do not have trac- NOTE: read “Release Brake”. tion. Damage to the transmission may oc- Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for cur. 5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. extended track usage due to increased ther- mal capacity.

165 • At the conclusion of each track event, it is • Tire pressure: another ½ lap at speed, then do a two lap recommended that a brake bleed proce- – 40 psi (276 kpa) hot, recommend cool down with minimal brake applies. dure is performed to maintain the pedal 32 psi (221 kpa) front, 30 psi (207 kpa) Make sure the brakes are not smoking. feel and stopping capability of your Brembo rear cold If they are, do another cool down lap. High Performance brake system. NOTE: 3. Do not continue for more than 1 full It is recommended that you target 40 psi • It is recommended that each track outing burnishing lap after you start smelling the (276 kpa) Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion should end with a minimum of 1 cool down brakes. Do not get them smoking heavily. of each track session. Starting at 32 psi lap using minimal braking. This will get them too hot and affect their (221 kpa) Front & 30 psi (207 kpa) Rear • If equipped with a removable lower front life negatively in future track use. Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it conditions is recommended. Tire pressure 4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the pad- for track use during warm/hot weather to can be monitored via the instrument cluster dock for at least 30 min. If an infrared improve cooling airflow to critical pow- display and can assist with adjustments. thermal gun is available, allow rotors to ertrain and cooling system components. cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back • All SRT vehicles are track tested for Track burnishing your brakes: out. STARTING AND OPERATING 24 hours of endurance, however, it is rec- To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, 5. There should be a thin, ash layer when ommended that suspension system, brake the brake pads and rotors must have a ther- inspecting the pads installed in the cali- system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots mal burnish for factory installed components per. Having the ash layer go more than should be checked for wear or damage after or when new brake friction components are half the thickness of the pad material every track event. installed: indicates too aggressive of a burnish. • Track usage results in increased operating 1. Use one track session to burnish brakes 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is temperatures of the engine, transmission, by driving at 75% speed. Brake at ap- required. If the pads start smelling in the driveline and brake system. This may affect proximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABS noise (NVH) countermeasures designed next track session, reduce speed and intervention. into your vehicle. New components may braking decel to burnish targets and fol- need to be installed to return the system to 2. Lap the track in this manner until you low step 2-4. the original NVH performance. start smelling the brakes. Continue for

166 7. New pads installed on old rotors still need NOTE: to be burnished. New rotors installed with In order to ensure proper operation, the old pads should be burnished at the track Speed Control System has been designed to or street driven for 300 city miles to shut down if multiple Speed Control func- develop an adequate lining transfer layer tions are operated at the same time. If this on the rotor surface prior to track use. occurs, the Speed Control System can be 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use reactivated by pushing the Speed Control should be replaced. Resurfacing of the on/off button and resetting the desired ve- rotors is not recommended, as it removes hicle set speed. mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal Activation capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increas- Push the on/off button to activate the speed ing the likelihood of pulsation in further control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will ap- pear on the instrument cluster display to track use. Speed Control Switches indicate the speed control is on. To turn the SPEED CONTROL 1 — Push Cancel system off, push the on/off button a second 2 — Push Set+/Accel time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on When engaged, the Speed Control takes over 3 — Push Resume the instrument cluster display to indicate the accelerator operations at speeds greater than 4 — Push On/Off speed control is off. The system should be 5 — Push Set-/Decel 25 mph (40 km/h). turned off when not in use. The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could acci- dentally set the system or cause it to go

167 The driver's preferred units can be selected • If the button is continually pushed, the set WARNING! through the instrument panel settings if speed will continue to increase until the faster than you want. You could lose con- equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your button is released, then the new set speed trol and have an accident. Always leave the Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at will be established. system off when you are not using it. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html To Decrease Speed (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca Setting A Desired Speed (Canadian Residents) for more information. When the Speed Control is set, you can de- Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle The speed increment shown is dependant crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or has reached the desired speed, push the The driver's preferred units can be selected Metric (km/h): SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Re- through the instrument panel settings if lease the accelerator and the vehicle will U.S. Speed (mph) equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your operate at the selected speed. Once a speed • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each

STARTING AND OPERATING (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp, subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. (Canadian Residents) for more information. along with set speed will also appear and stay The speed increment shown is dependant on in the instrument cluster display when the • If the button is continually pushed, the set on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or speed is set. speed will continue to increase until the Metric (km/h): button is released, then the new set speed Varying The Speed will be established. U.S. Speed (mph) Once the Speed Control has been activated, Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result the speed can be increased or decreased. in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result To Increase Speed subsequent tap of the button results in a in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each decrease of 1 mph. When the Speed Control is set, you can in- subsequent tap of the button results in an crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button. increase of 1 km/h.

168 • If the button is continually pushed, the set Deactivation speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the will be established. CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Metric Speed (km/h) Control without erasing the set speed from • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result memory. in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni- decrease of 1 km/h. tion switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the ADAPTIVE CRUISE button is released, then the new set speed will be established. CONTROL (ACC) Resume Speed If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Adaptive Cruise Switches Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly 1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off To resume a previously set speed, push the the same as the speed control with only a 2 — Distance Setting – Decrease RES button and release. Resume can be used couple of differences. With this option you 3 — Distance Setting – Increase at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). can set a specified distance you would like to Accelerating For Passing maintain between you and the vehicle in front If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, of you. Press the accelerator as you would normally. ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration When the pedal is released, the vehicle will automatically to maintain a preset following return to the set speed. distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

169 If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. • The ACC system applies the brake down to of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to a full stop when following a target vehicle. accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: If an ACC host vehicle follows a target Activation vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will will release the vehicle brakes two seconds Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control appear in the instrument cluster display. (ACC) on/off button. after coming to a full stop. • The system will not be controlling the dis- • The ACC system maintains set speed when “ACC READY” will appear in the instrument tance between your vehicle and the vehicle driving up hill and down hill. However, a cluster display to indicate the ACC is on. ahead. The vehicle speed will only be de- slight speed change on moderate hills is termined by the position of the accelerator Setting A Desired Speed normal. In addition, downshifting may occur pedal. while climbing uphill or descending down- When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, Varying The Speed hill. This is normal operation and necessary push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and release. The instrument cluster display Once the ACC has been activated, the speed and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if STARTING AND OPERATING will show the set speed. can be increased or decreased. the braking temperature exceeds normal If the system is set when the vehicle speed is NOTE: range (overheated). below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall • When you override and push the SET (+) To Increase Speed be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the button or SET (-) buttons, the new set system is set when the vehicle speed is above While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed will be the current speed of the 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the speed by pushing the SET (+) button. vehicle. current speed of the vehicle. The driver's preferred units can be selected • When you use the SET (-) button to decel- through the instrument panel settings if NOTE: erate, if the engine’s braking power does equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at vehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox- the set speed, the brake system will auto- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html imity. matically slow the vehicle. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca 170 (Canadian Residents) for more information. To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) The speed increment shown is dependant on While ACC is set, the set speed can be de- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) creased by pushing the SET (-) button. in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each units: subsequent tap of the button results in a The driver's preferred units can be selected decrease of 1 km/h. U.S. Speed (mph) through the instrument panel settings if • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your • If the button is continually pushed, the set in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h subsequent tap of the button results in an www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html decrements until the button is released. increase of 1 mph. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca The decrease in set speed is reflected in the (Canadian Residents) for more information. instrument cluster display. • If the button is continually pushed, the set The speed increment shown is dependant on speed will continue to increase in 5 mph the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) ToResume increments until the button is released. The units: If there is a set speed in memory push the RES increase in set speed is reflected in the (resume) button and then remove your foot instrument cluster display. U.S. Speed (mph) from the accelerator pedal. The instrument • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result Metric Speed (km/h) cluster display will show the last set speed. in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result subsequent tap of the button results in a NOTE: in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each decrease of 1 mph. • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer subsequent tap of the button results in an • If the button is continually pushed, the set than two seconds, then the system will increase of 1 km/h. speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph cancel and the brake force will be ramped- • If the button is continually pushed, the set decrements until the button is released. out. The driver will have to apply the brakes speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h The decrease in set speed is reflected in the to keep the vehicle at a standstill. instrument cluster display. increments until the button is released. The • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a station- increase in set speed is reflected in the ary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close instrument cluster display. proximity. 171 WARNING! WARNING! ACC Operation At Stop If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a The Resume function should only be used you want. You could lose control and have standstill while following a target vehicle, if if traffic and road conditions permit. Re- an accident. Always leave the system OFF the target vehicle starts moving within two suming a set speed that is too high or too when you are not using it. seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand- low for prevailing traffic and road condi- tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate Setting The Following Distance still, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action. or decelerate too sharply for safe opera- The specified following distance for ACC can tion. Failure to follow these warnings can be set by varying the distance setting be- If the target vehicle does not start moving result in a collision and death or serious tween four bars (longest), three bars (long), within two seconds of your vehicle coming to personal injury. two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel Deactivation this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the message will display on the instrument clus- Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears ter display and produce a warning chime. STARTING AND OPERATING (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the in the instrument cluster display. Driver intervention will be required at this system off. moment. • To increase the distance setting, push the “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will ap- Distance Setting—Increase button and While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle pear in the instrument cluster display to release. Each time the button is pushed, at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is un- indicate the ACC is off. the distance setting increases by one bar buckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC (longer). with Stop system will cancel and the brakes WARNING! • To decrease the distance setting, push the will release. A cancel message will display on Distance Setting—Decrease button and re- the instrument cluster display and produce a Leaving the ACC system on when not in lease. Each time the button is pushed, the warning chime. Driver intervention will be use is dangerous. You could accidentally distance setting decreases by one bar required at this moment. set the system or cause it to go faster than (shorter).

172 Refer to your Owner's Manual at WARNING! www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html WARNING! When the ACC system is resumed, the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather driver must ensure that there are no pedes- (Canadian Residents) for further information. conditions into account, and may be trians, vehicles or objects in the path of limited upon adverse sight distance con- the vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- WARNING! ditions. ings can result in a collision and death or • Does not always fully recognize complex serious personal injury. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- driving conditions, which can result in nience system. It is not a substitute for wrong or missing distance warnings. Changing Modes active driving involvement. It is always the • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop driver’s responsibility to be attentive of while following a target vehicle and hold If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode road, traffic, and weather conditions, ve- the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop can be turned off and the system can be hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; position. If the target vehicle does not operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise and, most importantly, brake operation to start moving within two seconds the ACC Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed ensure safe operation of the vehicle under system will display a message that the Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance all road conditions. Your complete atten- system will release the brakes and that setting feature will be disabled and the sys- tion is always required while driving to the brakes must be applied manually. An tem will maintain the speed you set. maintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail- audible chime will sound when the • To change between the different cruise con- ure to follow these warnings can result in a brakes are released. trol modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Con- collision and death or serious personal You should switch off the ACC system: trol (ACC) on/off button which turns the injury. • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise The ACC system: snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex Control off. • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming driving situations (i.e., in highway con- vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., struction zones). • Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a • When entering a turn lane or highway off Control on/off button will result in turning disabled vehicle). on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) ramp; when driving on roads that are Cruise Control mode.

173 WARNING! WARNING! PARKSENSE REAR PARK winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or You can change the mode by using the ASSIST have steep uphill or downhill slopes. Cruise Control buttons. The two control ParkSense Sensors • When towing a trailer up or down steep modes function differently. Always con- slopes. firm which mode is selected. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the • When circumstances do not allow safe rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind driving at a constant speed. General Information the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field The Cruise Control system has two control of view. The sensors can detect obstacles The following regulatory statement applies to modes: from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main- 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ this vehicle: taining an appropriate distance between bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- vehicles. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ing on the location, type and orientation of • Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Rules and with Industry Canada license- the obstacle.

STARTING AND OPERATING mode for cruising at a constant pre- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- Activation/Deactivation ParkSense set speed. For additional informa- ject to the following two conditions: tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with Cruise Control Mode” in your Owner’s 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- the ParkSense switch . Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ ference. owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or 2. This device must accept any interference When the ParkSense switch is pushed to www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- received, including interference that may disable the system, the instrument cluster dents) for further details. cause undesired operation. display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will message for approximately five seconds. not react to preceding vehicles. Always be NOTE: Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in aware of the mode selected. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel in proved by the party responsible for compli- the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ ance could void the user’s authority to oper- care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or ate the equipment. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) 174 for more information. When the gear selector between the rear fascia/bumper and the de- • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol- is moved to REVERSE and the system is tected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. disabled, the instrument cluster display will Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak- show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as ment Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at ing care not to scratch or damage them. The long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca The ParkSense switch LED will be on when slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so (Canadian Residents) for further information. ParkSense is disabled or requires service. can result in the system not working prop- The ParkSense switch LED will be off when ParkSense System Usage Precautions erly. The ParkSense system might not de- the system is enabled. If the ParkSense tect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, switch is pushed, and the system requires NOTE: or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, momentarily, and then the LED will be on. ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system operating properly. ParkSense system OFF if objects such as Instrument Cluster Display bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi- The ParkSense Warning screen will only brations could affect the performance of placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the be displayed if Sound and Display is se- ParkSense. rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can lected from the Customer - Programmable result in the system misinterpreting a close • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument object as a sensor problem, causing the Features section of the Uconnect System. cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”. “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it REQUIRED” message to appear in the in- media” in the Owner’s Manual at remains off until you turn it on again, even if strument cluster display. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html you cycle the ignition. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca • ParkSense should be disabled when the • When you move the gear selector to the (Canadian Residents) for further information. REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned liftgate is in the open position and the The ParkSense Warning screen is located off, the instrument cluster display will show vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate within the instrument cluster display. It pro- a “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long could provide a false indication that an vides visual warnings to indicate the distance as the vehicle is in REVERSE. obstacle is behind the vehicle. 175 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ WARNING! CAUTION! bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- • Drivers must be careful when backing up • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is ing on the location, type and orientation of even when using ParkSense. Always unable to recognize every obstacle, in- the obstacle. check carefully behind your vehicle, cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs The six ParkSense sensors, located in the look behind you, and be sure to check might be temporarily detected or not front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, detected at all. Obstacles located above of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field obstructions, and blind spots before or below the sensors will not be detected of view. The sensors can detect obstacles backing up. You are responsible for when they are in close proximity. from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to safety and must continue to pay atten- • The vehicle must be driven slowly when 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ tion to your surroundings. Failure to do using ParkSense in order to be able to so can result in serious injury or death. stop in time when an obstacle is de- bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly tected. It is recommended that the ing on the location, type and orientation of recommended that the ball mount and driver looks over his/her shoulder when the obstacle. STARTING AND OPERATING hitch ball assembly is disconnected using ParkSense. When an object is detected within 79 inches from the vehicle when the vehicle is not (200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the used for towing. Failure to do so can vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear result in injury or damage to vehicles or PARKSENSE FRONT AND in the instrument cluster display. In addition obstacles because the hitch ball will be REAR PARK ASSIST a chime will sound (when Sound and Display much closer to the obstacle than the is selected from the Customer Programmable rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds ParkSense Sensors Features section of the Uconnect System the continuous tone. Also, the sensors The four ParkSense sensors, located in the could detect the ball mount and hitch screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind ball assembly, depending on its size and object, the chime rate will change from single the vehicle that is within the sensors field shape, giving a false indication that an 1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for of view. The sensors can detect obstacles obstacle is behind the vehicle. rear only), to fast, to continuous. from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to

176 Activation/Deactivation Engagement/Disengagement Operation With A Trailer The ParkSense Park Assist system provides To disengage the system, push the ParkSense The operation of the sensors is automatically visual and audible indications of the distance switch, located on the switch panel below the deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is between the rear and/or front fascia and a Uconnect display. inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The detected obstacle when backing up or moving sensors are automatically reactivated when When the system passes from engaged to forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If the trailer's cable plug is removed. disengaged and vice versa, it is always ac- your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic companied by a dedicated message in the General Warnings Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be au- instrument cluster display. tomatically applied and released when per- If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR forming a reverse parking maneuver if the System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off. SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the system detects a possible collision with an System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on obstacle. instrument cluster display, clean the constantly. ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap ParkSense can be active only when the gear The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense the case of a ParkSense system failure. If the cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. is enabled at one of these gear selector posi- button is pushed with a system failure, the Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. tions, the system will remain active until the ParkSense switch LED flashes for about five vehicle speed is increased to approximately seconds, then it stays on constantly. PARKSENSE ACTIVE 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — will appear in the instrument cluster display After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense will stay in this condition until the following IF EQUIPPED operating speed. The system will become engagement, even if the ignition device The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is active again if the vehicle speed is decreased passes from ON/RUN to OFF and then again intended to assist the driver during parallel to speeds less than approximately 6 mph to ON/RUN. and perpendicular parking maneuvers by (9 km/h). identifying a proper parking space, providing

177 audible/visual instructions, and controlling • The system may not work in all conditions the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active (e.g. environmental conditions such as Park Assist system is defined as “semi- heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a automatic” since the driver maintains control parking space that has surfaces that will of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). Depending on the driver's parking maneuver • New vehicles from the dealership must selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumu- system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle lated before the ParkSense Active Park into a parallel or a perpendicular parking Assist system is fully calibrated and per- space on either side (i.e., driver side or pas- forms accurately. This is due to the sys- senger side). tem’s dynamic vehicle calibration to im- ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch prove the performance of the feature. The NOTE: Location system will also continuously perform the • The driver is always responsible for control- dynamic vehicle calibration to account for To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist STARTING AND OPERATING ling the vehicle, responsible for any sur- differences such as over or under inflated system, push the ParkSense Active Park rounding objects, and must intervene as tires and new tires. Assist switch once (LED turns on). required. To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active • The system is provided to assist the driver system, push the ParkSense Active Park Park Assist System Assist switch again (LED turns off). and not to substitute the driver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - driver touches the steering wheel after be- Active Park Assist switch, located on the Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message ing instructed to remove their hands from switch panel below the Uconnect display. will appear in the instrument cluster display. the steering wheel, the system will cancel, You may switch to perpendicular parking if you and the driver will be required to manually desire. Push the OK button on the left side complete the parking maneuver.

178 steering wheel switch to change your parking When both lane markings are detected and NOTE: space setting. You may switch back to parallel the driver unintentionally drifts out of the When operating conditions have been met, the parking if you desire. lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides When searching for a parking space, use the system provides a haptic warning in the turn signal indicator to select which side of form of torque applied to the steering an audible warning to the driver when the the vehicle you want to perform the parking wheel to prompt the driver to remain within driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does maneuver. the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the not return their hands to the wheel. NOTE: LaneSense system provides a visual warning TurningLaneSense On Or Off If the turn signal is not activated, the through the instrument cluster display to ParkSense Active Park Assist system will au- The default status of LaneSense is off. The prompt the driver to remain within the lane tomatically search for a parking space on the LED in LaneSense button will be illuminated boundaries. passenger's side of the vehicle. while the system is deactivated. The driver may manually override the haptic Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/ The LaneSense button is located on the warning by applying torque into the steering en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) switch panel below the Uconnect display. wheel at any time. or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) To turn the LaneSense system on, push for further information. When only a single lane marking is detected the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A and the driver unintentionally drifts across “LaneSense On” message is shown in the LANESENSE the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the instrument cluster display. LaneSense system provides visual and haptic LaneSense Operation To turn the LaneSense system off, push the warnings through the instrument cluster dis- LaneSense button once (LED turns on). The LaneSense system is operational at play to prompt the driver to remain within the speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below lane. When only a single lane marking is NOTE: 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense sys- detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not The LaneSense system will retain the last tem uses a forward looking camera to detect be provided. system state on or off from the last ignition lane markings and measure vehicle position cycle when the ignition is changed to the within the lane boundaries. ON/RUN position. 179 PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP Refer to “ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera — If REFUELING THE VEHICLE — Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in your CAMERA Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ GASOLINE ENGINE Symbols And Messages On The Display care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or 1. Push the fuel filler door release switch www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) (located under the headlamp switch). You can see an on-screen image of the rear of for further details. your vehicle whenever the transmission is shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear WARNING! Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on the Uconnect Display, located on the center Drivers must be careful when backing up; stack of the instrument panel. even when using the ParkView Rear If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully the camera lens located on the rear of the behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, vehicle above the rear license plate. obstructions, or blind spots before backing STARTING AND OPERATING Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed up. You must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or result in serious injury or death. DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be acti- vated with the “Rear View Camera” button in the Controls menu. This feature allows the Fuel Filler Door Release Switch customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to 2. Open the fuel filler door. ten seconds while at speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the “X” button on the touchscreen.

180 4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flap- per doors while refueling. 5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. 6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle. 7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. Emergency Gas Can Refueling • Most gas cans will not open the flapper Fuel Filler Door Latch doors. Fuel Filler NOTE: • A funnel is provided to open the flapper • Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flap- In certain cold conditions, ice may pre- doors to allow emergency refueling with a per doors open. gas can. vent the fuel door from opening. If this • Pour fuel into funnel opening. occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to • Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage • Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off break the ice buildup and re-release the area. fuel door using the inside release button. prior to putting back in the spare tire stor- • Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening age area. Do not pry on the door. as the fuel nozzle. 3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seals the system.

181 4. Remove the storage bin. WARNING! Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, 5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel • Never have any smoking materials lit in use the fuel filler door emergency release. door, push the release cable back to the or near the vehicle when the fuel door is home position to re-seat the fuel door 1. Open the liftgate. open or the tank is being filled. latch to the closed position. • Never add fuel when the engine is run- 2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage ning. This is in violation of most state bin to the center, this will pop up the and federal fire regulations and may outboard edge. cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground

STARTING AND OPERATING while filling.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. Release Cable

NOTE: Storage Bin Location If the fuel door does not latch after the manual release cable has been activated, the 3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other actuator latch should be manually returned hand to disengage snaps. to the closed position.

182 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the DIESEL ENGINE flapper door while refueling. 1. Press the fuel filler door release switch 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel (located under the headlamp switch). nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. 5. Wait five seconds before removing the nozzle to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle. 6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.

Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location

1 — Fuel Fill Location 2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch NOTE: 2. Open the fuel filler door. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the filler pipe seals the system.

183 Emergency Fuel Can Refueling 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle. WARNING! Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door. • Never have any smoking materials lit in A funnel is provided to open the flapper door or near the vehicle when the fuel door is to allow emergency refueling with a fuel can. open or the tank is being filled. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire kit. • Never add fuel when the engine is run- ning. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while

STARTING AND OPERATING filling.

Emergency Fuel Fill Location CAUTION!

NOTE: To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. flapper door open. Fuel Fill Funnel/Spare Tire/Jack And Tools 3. Pour fuel into funnel opening. Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel 1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel 2 — Spare Tire 4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt 3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack prior to putting back in the spare tire kit. can cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential. Refer to

184 “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte- You can operate with the comfort that your nance” in your Diesel Supplement at WARNING! vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html Do not open the high pressure fuel system world environment for this and generations to (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca with the engine running. Engine operation come. (Canadian Residents) for further information. causes high fuel pressure. High pressure System Overview fuel spray can cause serious injury or Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel death. This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust If you store quantities of fuel, good mainte- Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective nance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel Diesel Exhaust Fluid Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the contaminated with water will promote the emission requirements. Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective growth of “microbes.” These microbes form Catalytic Reduction system to meet the very The DEF injection system consists of the “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration sys- stringent diesel emissions standards required following components: tem and lines. Drain condensation from the by the Environmental Protection Agency. • DEF tank supply tank and change the line filter on a regular basis. The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce • DEF pump levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from • DEF injector NOTE: engines) that are harmful to our health and • Electronically-heated DEF lines When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of the environment to a near-zero level. Small fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system. quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is • NOx sensors If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Dealer injected into the exhaust upstream of a cata- • Temperature sensors lyst where, when vaporized, it converts smog- Service / Priming If The Engine Has Run • SCR catalyst Out Of Fuel” in “Servicing And Mainte- forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nance” in your Diesel Supplement at nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html natural components of the air we breathe. enable the achievement of diesel emissions (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability, torque and power (Canadian Residents) for further information. ratings. 185 Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in NOTE: DEF Fill Procedure “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for When working with DEF, it is important to NOTE: system messages and warnings. know that: Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the NOTE: • Any containers or parts that come into con- “Technical Specifications” section for the tact with DEF must be DEF compatible correct fluid type. • Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injec- (plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass, tion system. You may occasionally hear an 1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel audible clicking noise from under the ve- fuel door). should be avoided as they are subject to hicle at a stop. This is normal operation. corrosion by DEF. • The DEF pump will run for a period of time • If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up after engine shutdown to purge the DEF completely. system. This is normal operation and may be audible from the rear of the vehicle. Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

STARTING AND OPERATING Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster display) will display the level of DEF Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument very stable product with a long shelf life. If Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and Instrument Panel” for further information. 90°F (-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year. NOTE: Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest tem- load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that peratures. For example, DEF may freeze at DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill is used in your vehicle. temperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). The 1 — Diesel Fuel Filler system has been designed to operate in this 2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler environment.

186 2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet. CAUTION! CAUTION! • Never add anything other than DEF to NOTE: • To avoid DEF spillage, and possible dam- age to the DEF tank from overfilling, do the tank – especially any form of hydro- • The DEF gauge may take up to five not “top off” the DEF tank after filling. carbon such as diesel fuel, fuel system seconds to update after adding a gallon • DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze additives, gasoline, or any other or more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) below 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is petroleum-based product. Even a very to the DEF tank. If you have a fault designed to work in temperatures below small amount of these, less than related to the DEF system, the gauge the DEF freezing point, however, if the 100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. may not update to the new level. See tank is overfilled and freezes, the system per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contami- your authorized dealer for service. could be damaged. nate the entire DEF system and will • When DEF is spilled, clean the area require replacement. If owners use a • The DEF gauge may also not immedi- container, funnel or nozzle when refilling ately update after a refill if the tempera- immediately with water and use an ab- sorbent material to soak up the spills on the tank, it should either be new or one ture of the DEF fluid is below 12F that is has only been used for adding (-11C). The DEF line heater will possi- the ground. • Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF. Mopar provides an attachable bly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the nozzle with its DEF for this purpose. gauge to update after a period of run DEF is accidentally added to the diesel time. Under very cold conditions, it is fuel tank as it can result in severe dam- 3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately possible that the gauge may not reflect age to your engine, including but not when any of the following happen: DEF the new fill level for several drives. limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors. stops flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off. 4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.

187 TRAILER TOWING Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — Non SRT The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain: Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. Engine Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note) 3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) 3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) 3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg) 3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg) STARTING AND OPERATING 5.7L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg) 5.7L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: tion. The addition of passengers and cargo The trailer tongue weight must be considered may require reducing trailer tongue load and as part of the combined weight of occupants Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing and cargo, and should never exceed the cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to weight referenced on the Tire and Loading avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Ser- Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg). vicing And Maintenance” for further informa-

188 Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — Diesel The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain: Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. Engine Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note) 3.0L Diesel 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3,356 kg) 740 lbs (335 kg) 3.0L Diesel 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: may require reducing trailer tongue load and The trailer tongue weight must be considered Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing as part of the combined weight of occupants cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to and cargo, and should never exceed the avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg). Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Ser- vicing And Maintenance” for further informa- tion. The addition of passengers and cargo

189 Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Rating) (See Note) 6.2L Supercharged Auto- 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg) matic 6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: • The manufacturer does not recommend us- ing the run flat feature while driving a • The trailer tongue weight must be consid- vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a ered as part of the combined weight of trailer. occupants and cargo, and should never STARTING AND OPERATING exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

190 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal 2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (to- (Summit Models) — If Equipped wards you), pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer receiver cover. hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia. 1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the locking retainer if needed for Hitch Receiver Cover added leverage. 1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Tab Locations 2 — Locking Retainers Hitch Receiver Cover

191 To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal towing repeat the procedure in reverse order. (SRT Models) — If Equipped NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation. access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia. 1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the

STARTING AND OPERATING slot of the locking retainer if needed for Hitch Receiver Cover added leverage. 1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Retaining Tabs 2 — Hitch Receiver Cover 3 — Locking Retainers Hitch Receiver Cover 1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Tab Locations 2 — Locking Retainers

192 2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward 3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after (towards you). located at the top of the hitch receiver towing repeat the procedure in reverse order. cover and then pull outwards to remove. NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch re- ceiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.

Hitch Receiver Cover Hitch Receiver Cover 1 — Hitch Receiver Cover Retaining Tabs 2 — Hitch Receiver Cover 3 — Locking Retainer

193 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models With Without 4–LO Range 4–LO Range Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions • Transmission in PARK • Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) • Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: NOTE: “Starting and Operating” for more informa- tion. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT ve- • When towing your vehicle, always follow Transport mode (for example, engine will hicles. applicable state and provincial laws. Con- not run), tie-downs should be fastened over These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or tact state and provincial Highway Safety the tires using specific straps (not to the offices for additional details. vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF body). Failure to follow these instructions the ground. • Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must may cause fault codes to be set and/or be placed in Transport Mode before tying cause loss of proper tie-down tension. them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in

194 Recreational Towing-TwoWheel Drive 5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the NOTE: Models dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or instructions. vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the the ground. drivetrain will result. 6. Install a suitable clamping device, de- signed for towing, to secure the front Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive wheels in the straight position. CAUTION! models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom- CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. above requirements can cause severe If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: Towing with the rear wheels on the ground transmission and/or transfer case damage. will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov- 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow ve- Damage from improper towing is not cov- ered under the New Vehicle Limited War- hicle, following the dolly manufacturer's ered under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. instructions. ranty. NOTE: Recreational Towing— Quadra–Trac II/ If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air Recreational Towing— Quadra-Trac I Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to (Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Normal Ride Height. The transfer case must be shifted into NEU- Drive Models TRAL (N) and the transmission must be in 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. Recreational towing is not allowed. These PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position (N) selection button is adjacent to the trans- transmission into PARK. in the transfer case. fer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of 4. Turn the ignition OFF. transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.

195 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on • DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. It is necessary to follow these steps to be tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper Towing with only one set of wheels on certain that the transfer case is fully in face bar will be damaged. the ground (front or rear) will cause NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing severe transmission and/or transfer case to prevent damage to internal parts. damage. Tow with all four wheels either Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on a vehicle trailer). WARNING! level ground, with the engine running. • Tow only in a forward direction. Towing 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. this vehicle backwards can cause severe You or others could be injured or killed if damage to the transfer case. you leave the vehicle unattended with the 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position • The transmission must be in PARK for 4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air recreational towing. without first fully engaging the parking suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to STARTING AND OPERATING • Before recreational towing, perform the brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) Normal Ride Height. procedure outlined under “Shifting into position disengages both the front and rear NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the driveshafts from the powertrain and will 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans- push and hold the recessed transfer case mission is in PARK. The parking brake Otherwise, internal damage will result. NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se- should always be applied when the driver • Towing this vehicle in violation of the lector switch) for four seconds. The light is not in the vehicle. above requirements can cause severe behind the N symbol will blink, indicating transmission and/or transfer case dam- Use the following procedure to prepare your shift in progress. The light will stop blink- age. Damage from improper towing is vehicle for recreational towing. ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEU- not covered under the New Vehicle Lim- TRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL ited Warranty. DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the instrument cluster.

196 11. With the transmission and transfer case in • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE for a shift to take place and for the position START/STOP button until the engine indicator lights to be operable. If the igni- turns off. tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator 12. Place the transmission gear selector in lights will be on or flashing. PARK. Release the brake pedal. • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator 13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button light indicates that shift requirements have twice (without pressing the brake pedal), not been met. to turn the ignition to the OFF mode. • If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift 14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle air suspension, the engine should be NEUTRAL (N) Switch using a suitable tow bar. started and left running for a minimum of 6. After the shift is completed and the NEU- 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at 15. Release the parking brake. least once every 24 hours. This process TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU- allows the air suspension to adjust the TRAL (N) button. NOTE: vehicle’s ride height to compensate for 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. • Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that temperature effects. must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL 8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds (N) button, and must continue to be met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) and ensure that there is no vehicle until the shift has been completed. If any of Use the following procedure to prepare your movement. these requirements are not met before vehicle for normal usage. 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leav- transmission back into NEUTRAL. longer met during the shift, then the NEU- ing it connected to the tow vehicle. TRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu- 10. Firmly apply the parking brake. ously until all requirements are met or until 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. 3. Start the engine.

197 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. the engine OFF. for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the igni- 9. Release the brake pedal. 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift push and hold the recessed transfer case 10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. will not take place and no position indicator NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the se- 11. Start the engine. lights will be on or flashing. lector switch) for one second. 12. Press and hold the brake pedal. • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have 13. Release the parking brake. not been met. 14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, re- lease the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

NOTE: STARTING AND OPERATING • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met NEUTRAL (N) Switch until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) but- longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL ton. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has (N) indicator light will flash continuously been released, the transfer case will shift until all requirements are met or until the to the position indicated by the selector NEUTRAL (N) button is released. switch.

198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING JUMPSTARTING...... 215 ENHANCED ACCIDENT FLASHERS...... 200 Preparations For Jump Starting...... 216 RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS). . . .223 Control ...... 200 Jump Starting Procedure...... 216 EVENT DATA RECORDER BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 200 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .218 (EDR)...... 223 Replacement Bulbs ...... 200 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .218 Bulb Replacement ...... 201 FUSES...... 204 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...... 218 General Information...... 205 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . .220 Underhood Fuses ...... 205 TOWING A DISABLED JACKING AND TIRE VEHICLE...... 221 CHANGING ...... 210 Two-Wheel Drive Models ...... 222 Run Flat Tires — SRT Models...... 210 Four-Wheel Drive Models ...... 222 Jack/Spare Tire Stowage ...... 210 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . .223 Changing Procedure ...... 215

199 HAZARD WARNING BULB REPLACEMENT Bulb Number Headlamps (High FLASHERS H9 Replacement Bulbs Beam) — If Equipped Control Interior Bulbs Premium Park/Turn LED - (Service At Signal Lamp Authorized Dealer) The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located Bulb Number on the switch bank just above the climate Premium Daytime LED - (Service At Glove Compartment 194 Running Lamp (DRL) Authorized Dealer) controls. Lamp H11 Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warn- Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Front Fog Lamps LED - (Service At ing flasher. When the switch is activated, all Overhead Console Authorized Dealer) VT4976 directional turn signals will flash on and off to Reading Lamps Front Side Marker — W5W warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2 If Equipped the switch a second time to turn off the Visor Vanity Lamp V26377 Premium Front Side LED - (Service At IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Hazard Warning flashers. Underpanel Courtesy Marker — If Equipped Authorized Dealer) 906 Lamps Front Park/Turn This is an emergency warning system and it 7444NA (WY28/8W) Instrument Cluster Lamp — If Equipped should not be used when the vehicle is in 103 (General Illumination) Rear Body Side motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and 7440 (W21W) Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74 Backup Lamp it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. Auxiliary Liftgate LED - (Service At When you must leave the vehicle to seek Tail Lamps Authorized Dealer) Exterior Bulbs Liftgate Backup assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will 921 (W16W) continue to operate even though the ignition Bulb Number Lamps LED - (Service At is placed in the OFF position. Headlamps Rear License Lamps (Low Beam) — H11 Authorized Dealer) NOTE: If Equipped Rear Body Side 3157KRD LCP With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers Premium Headlamps D3S (Service At Stop/Turn Lamps (P27/7W) may discharge the battery. (Low/High Beam) Authorized Dealer)

200 2. Access the back of the headlamp. Bulb Number WARNING! Rear Body Side Tail LED - (Service At NOTE: Lamps Authorized Dealer) A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb CHMSL - Center sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) • The air filter housing must be removed. LED - (Service At High Mounted headlamps when the headlamp switch is Authorized Dealer) • The windshield washer reservoir may Stop Lamp turned ON. It may cause serious electrical need to be rotated out of the way by shock or electrocution if not serviced prop- NOTE: removing the fastener. Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that erly. See your authorized dealer for service. can be purchased from your authorized • Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will dealer. NOTE: need to be repositioned by removing the If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your On vehicles equipped with High Intensity fasteners, and moving the unit out of authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the head- the way. Service Manual. lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the 3. To access the low beam bulb you must lamps. This diminishes and becomes more remove the rubber boot seal from back- white after approximately 10 seconds, as the Bulb Replacement side of the lamp housing. system charges. High Intensity Discharge Headlamps NOTE: (HID) — If Equipped Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped Ensure the rubber boot is properly rein- NOTE: stalled to prevent water and moisture from The headlamps are a type of high voltage entering the lamp. discharge tube. High voltage can remain in Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- spheric conditions. This will usually clear as the circuit even with the headlamp switch off CAUTION! and the key removed. Because of this, you atmospheric conditions change to allow the should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb condensation to change back to vapor. Turn- • Do not contaminate the bulb glass by yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your ing the lamps on will usually accelerate the touching it with your fingers or by allow- vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. clearing process. ing it to contact other oily surfaces. 1. Open the hood. Shortened bulb life will result.

201 • Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps CAUTION! need to be repositioned by removing 1. Raise the liftgate. • Always use the correct bulb size and type the fasteners, and moving the unit out for replacement. An incorrect bulb size of the way. 2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail or type may overheat and cause damage lamp housing. 3. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp counterclockwise to remove from housing. wiring. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and 4. Turn the low or high beam bulb one– replace the bulb. quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing. CAUTION!

5. Disconnect the electrical connector and Do not touch the new bulb with your fin- replace the bulb. gers. Oil contamination will severely IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Turn Signal Lamp shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the The front turn signal lamps are LEDs. See bulb with rubbing alcohol. your authorized dealer for service. 1. Open the hood. Front Fog Lamps 2. Access the back of the headlamp. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Tail Lamp Push Pins NOTE: 3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rear- • The air filter housing must be removed. ward to disengage the lamp from the ap- erture panel. • The windshield washer reservoir may need to be rotated out of the way by removing the fastener.

202 4. Twist socket counter clockwise and re- Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp move from lamp.

Liftgate Lower Trim

3. Continue removing the trim. 4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights. 5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate sock- et(s) counter clockwise. Rear Of Tail Lamp Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps

1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket 1. Raise the liftgate. 2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove 3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket 2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from the liftgate.

5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. 6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly.

203 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) FUSES The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED. Service at an authorized dealer. WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Fail- ure to use proper fuses may result in IN CASE OF EMERGENCY serious personal injury, fire and/or prop- Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp erty damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – the ignition is off and that all the other Do Not Remove services are switched off and/or disen- 2 — Backup Bulb Socket Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp gaged. Rear License Lamp • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact 6. Remove/replace bulb(s). an authorized dealer. The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your • If a general protection fuse for safety 7. Reinstall the socket(s). authorized dealer for service. systems (air bag system, braking system), 8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate power unit systems (engine system, trans- trim. mission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

204 General Information Underhood Fuses The fuses protect electrical systems against The Power Distribution Center is located in excessive current. the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro When a device does not work, you must check fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A descrip- the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a tion of each fuse and component may be break/melt. stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the Also, please be aware that when using power cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the outlets for extended periods of time with the inside cover that corresponds to the following engine off may result in vehicle battery dis- chart. charge.

Power Distribution Center

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum Pump F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2 F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped

205 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1 F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine Cooling Pump F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1 F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling

206 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port F 45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If Equipped F51 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering Column Lock F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only) F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only) F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel engine only) F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel) F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain Sensor F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If Equipped F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped

207 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor F71 – 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM — If Equipped F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/Anti-Intrusion Module F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped/Trailer Tow/Steering Column Control Module F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module

208 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera/ParkSense F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If Equipped F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats — If Equipped F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/DSRC F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams — If Equipped F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)

CAUTION! CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution • When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor- center cover, it is important to ensure tant to use only a fuse having the correct the cover is properly positioned and fully amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a latched. Failure to do so may allow water rating other than indicated may result in to get into the power distribution center a dangerous electrical system overload. and possibly result in an electrical sys- If a properly rated fuse continues to tem failure. blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

209 JACKING AND TIRE Preparations For Jacking CHANGING CAUTION! Run Flat Tires — SRT Models Always lift or jack the vehicle from the This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires. correct jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be driven the vehicle or underbody components. approximately 50 miles (80km) at 55 mph (88km/h). Tire service should be obtained to NOTE: avoid prolonged run flat feature usage. To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system (if equipped) has a fea- WARNING! ture which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is Spare Tire/Jack And Tools Avoid ice or slippery surfaces. illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced. You could have a collision 1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel and be severely or fatally injured. 2 — Spare Tire WARNING! 3 — Tire Changing Tools And Jack Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic, Jack/Spare Tire Stowage pull far enough off the road to avoid being Spare Tire Stowage Jack Location hit when operating the jack or changing The spare tire is stowed under the load floor the wheel. The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools in the rear cargo area and is secured to the are located in rear cargo area, below the load body with a special wing nut. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. floor. 3. Apply the parking brake.

210 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. 7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, WARNING! 5. Turn the ignition OFF. refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” in the • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ it is on a jack. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) • Do not get under the vehicle when it is or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center dents) for further information on disabling where it can be raised on a lift. automatic leveling. • Only use the jack in the positions indi- Jacking Instructions cated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. WARNING! • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. Carefully follow these tire changing warn- • To assure that spare tires, flat or in- ings to help prevent personal injury or flated, are securely stowed, spares must damage to your vehicle: be stowed with the valve stem facing the • Always park on a firm, level surface as ground. Wheel Blocked far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. diagonally opposite of the jacking posi- • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the tion. For example, if changing the right wheel to be raised. front tire, block the left rear wheel. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK. NOTE: • Never start or run the engine with the Passengers should not remain in the ve- vehicle on a jack. hicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

211 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground. 3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.

Jacking Locations

4. For the front axle, place the jack on the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point sym- Warning Label bol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully CAUTION! engaged. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indi- cated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. Jack And Tools Assembled

212 WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. 8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone- shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location WARNING! 5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on 6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular until the tire just clears the surface and the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do enough clearance is obtained to install to follow this warning may result in serious not raise the vehicle until you are sure the the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides injury. jack is fully engaged. maximum stability.

213 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized Installing Spare Wheel/Tire dealer or at a service station. 11. Lower the jack to the fully closed posi-

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! tion and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray. Spare Tire Be sure to mount the spare tire with the 12. Remove the small center cap and se- valve stem facing outward. The vehicle 13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire curely store the road wheel in the cargo could be damaged if the spare tire is repaired as soon as possible, properly area. mounted incorrectly. secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), 9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, screw counterclockwise, and remove the and latch the rear load floor cover. jack and wheel blocks. NOTE: Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

214 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning WARNING! the jack handle counterclockwise. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a 4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery collision or hard stop could endanger the “Technical Specifications” for proper lug is frozen. It could rupture or explode and occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the nut torque. If in doubt about the correct cause personal injury. jack parts and the spare tire in the places tightness, have them checked with a provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re- torque wrench by your authorized dealer CAUTION! paired or replaced immediately. or service station. 5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut Do not use a portable battery booster pack Changing Procedure torque with a torque wrench to ensure that or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to all lug nuts are properly seated against the 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. the battery, starter motor, alternator or wheel. 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the electrical system may occur. cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. JUMP STARTING NOTE: If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can When using a portable battery booster pack WARNING! be jump started using a set of jumper cables follow the manufacturer's operating instruc- and a battery in another vehicle or by using a tions and precautions. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off portable battery booster pack. Jump starting the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully can be dangerous if done improperly so until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure please follow the procedures in this section to follow this warning may result in per- carefully. sonal injury.

215 Preparations For Jump Starting 3. Remove the protective cover over the re- WARNING! mote positive (+) battery post. Pull up- The battery in your vehicle is located under ward on the cover to remove it. the passenger's front seat. There are remote • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start locations located under the hood to assist in 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can battery, park the vehicle within the jump starting. be injured by moving fan blades. jumper cables reach, set the parking • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. WARNING! You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can Do not allow vehicles to touch each other burn your skin or eyes and generate as this could establish a ground connec- hydrogen gas which is flammable and tion and personal injury could result. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. Jump Starting Procedure

NOTE: WARNING! Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to Failure to follow this jump-starting proce- the either vehicle. dure could result in personal injury or Remote Battery Posts property damage due to battery explosion. 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto- 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post matic transmission into PARK and turn 2 — Remote Negative (–) Post the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec- essary electrical accessories.

216 Cable Connection 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the CAUTION! 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper booster battery, let the engine idle a few Failure to follow these procedures could cable to the remote positive (+) post of the minutes, and then start the engine in the result in damage to the charging system of discharged vehicle. vehicle with the discharged battery. the booster vehicle or the discharged ve- hicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive CAUTION! (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of NOTE: the booster battery. Do not run the booster vehicle engine Make sure at all times that unused ends of 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper above 2000 rpm since it provides no jumper cables are not contacting each other cable to the negative (-) post of the charging benefit, wastes fuel and can or either vehicle while making connections. booster battery. damage booster vehicle engine. If frequent jump starting is required to start 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative 6. Once the engine is started, remove the your vehicle you should have the battery and (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) jumper cables in the reverse sequence: charging system tested at your authorized post of the vehicle with the discharged Cable Disconnection dealer. battery. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the CAUTION! WARNING! jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle. Accessories plugged into the vehicle Do not connect the jumper cable to the 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega- power outlets draw power from the vehi- negative (-) post of the discharged battery. cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., The resulting electrical spark could cause tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if the battery to explode and could result in post of the booster battery. plugged in long enough without engine personal injury. Only use the specific 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the ground point, do not use any other exposed operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis- jumper cable from the positive (+) post of metal parts. charge sufficiently to degrade battery life the booster battery. and/or prevent the engine from starting.

217 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive NOTE: (+) jumper cable from the remote positive There are steps that you can take to slow CAUTION! (+) post of the discharged vehicle. down an impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. damage your vehicle. If the temperature remote positive (+) post of the discharged The A/C system adds heat to the engine gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop vehicle. cooling system and turning the A/C off can the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer help remove this heat. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY drops back into the normal range. If the • You can also turn the temperature control pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is to maximum heat, the mode control to floor continuous chimes, turn the engine off located in the spare tire storage area. If your and the blower control to high. This allows immediately and call for service. vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can the heater core to act as a supplement to is needed, insert the funnel into the filler the radiator and aids in removing heat from IN CASE OF EMERGENCY neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. the engine cooling system. MANUAL PARK RELEASE For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in WARNING! WARNING! “Starting And Operating” in this manual. You or others can be badly burned by hot Always secure your vehicle by fully apply- IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from ing the parking brake, before activating your radiator. If you see or hear steam the Manual Park Release. In addition, In any of the following situations, you can coming from under the hood, do not open you should be seated in the driver’s seat reduce the potential for overheating by taking the hood until the radiator has had time to with your foot firmly on the brake pedal the appropriate action. cool. Never try to open a cooling system when activating the Manual Park Release. • On the highways — slow down. pressure cap when the radiator or coolant Activating the Manual Park Release will • In city traffic — while stopped, place the bottle is hot. transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in- crease the engine idle speed while prevent- ing vehicle motion with the brakes. 218 WARNING! allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a discharged battery), a Manual Park Release is available. Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: Manual Park Release Cover Removed Released Position

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the CAUTION! 2. Open the center console and locate the brake pedal. Manual Park Release cover, remove it by 4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the Closing the armrest while the Manual Park snapping the cover away from the console metal latch in towards the tether strap. Release is activated may damage the hinges. Manual Park Release mechanism, the 5. While the metal latch is in the open posi- transmission, and/or the armrest. tion, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the lever clicks and NOTE: latches in the released position. The To prevent the vehicle from rolling uninten- transmission is now out of PARK and the tionally, firmly apply the parking brake. vehicle can be moved.

219 To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever: NOTE: WARNING! 1. To disengage the Manual Park Release Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can apply tension upward while pushing the only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. release latch towards the tether to unlock (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission Forces generated by excessive wheel the lever. remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec- speeds may cause damage, or even failure, onds, you must press the brake pedal to of the axle and tires. A tire could explode 2. Once the tension has been released and engage DRIVE or REVERSE. and injure someone. Do not spin your the lever has been unlocked be sure it is vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph stowed properly and locks into position. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds pressure that will maintain the rocking mo- continuously without stopping when you NOTE: tion without spinning the wheels or racing the are stuck and do not let anyone near a Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it engine. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. back in place. NOTE: IN CASE OF EMERGENCY FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to CAUTION! place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) • Racing the engine or spinning the If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking wheels may lead to transmission over- or snow, it can often be moved using a rock- the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con- heating and failure. Allow the engine to ing motion. Turn the steering wheel right and trol” in “Safety” in the Owner's Manual at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL left to clear the area around the front wheels. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html for at least one minute after every five Push and hold the lock button on the gear (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca rocking-motion cycles. This will mini- selector. Then shift back and forth between (Canadian Residents) for further information. mize overheating and reduce the risk of DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing Once the vehicle has been freed, push the transmission failure during prolonged the accelerator. "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" efforts to free a stuck vehicle. mode.

220 TOWING A DISABLED NOTE: CAUTION! Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting VEHICLE placed in Transport mode, before tying them between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin This section describes procedures for towing down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “Starting or drivetrain damage may result. service. If the transmission and drivetrain are And Operating” for more information. If the • Revving the engine or spinning the operable, disabled vehicles may also be vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode wheels too fast may lead to transmission towed as described under “Recreational Tow- (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs overheating and failure. It can also dam- must be fastened to the axles (not to the age the tires. Do not spin the wheels ing” in “Starting And Operating”. body). Failure to follow these instructions above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Four-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models With Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Without 4WD LOW Range 4WD LOW Range See instructions in “Recreational Towing” Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED • Transmission in PARK • Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) • Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK OK

221 NOTE: If the transmission is not operable, or the SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WD CAUTION! vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph LOW range should only be towed with all four • Do not use sling type equipment when (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), wheels OFF the ground. towing. Vehicle damage may occur. tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on Proper towing or lifting equipment is required • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear sus- a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only pension components. Damage to your ve- the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when tow bars and other equipment designed for hicle may result from improper towing. using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to this purpose, following equipment manufac- hold the front wheels in the straight position) turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Two-WheelDrive Models with the rear wheels raised and the front mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing wheels on the ground. device to main structural members of the The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack- CAUTION! IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles using a flatbed. Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or under tow must be observed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear transmission is operable, the vehicle may be If you must use the accessories (wipers, de- wheels on the ground can cause severe frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under transmission damage. Damage from im- must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC the following conditions: proper towing is not covered under the mode. • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Re- New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's fer to "Manual Park Release" in this section battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park for instructions on shifting the transmission Four-Wheel Drive Models to NEUTRAL when the engine is off. Release” in this section for instructions on The manufacturer recommends towing with shifting the transmission out of PARK for • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable meth- towing. (48 km/h). ods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with • The towing distance must not exceed one end of vehicle raised and the opposite 30 miles (48 km). end on a towing dolly. 222 If flatbed equipment is not available, and the Emergency TowHooks — If Equipped ENHANCED ACCIDENT transfer case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) there will be one in the rear and two mounted forward direction, with ALL wheels on the This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL Accident Response System. (N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to be located on the driver's side of the vehicle. “Recreational Towing” for detailed instruc- Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- NOTE: tions. tems” in “Safety” for further information on For off-road recovery, it is recommended to the Enhanced Accident Response System Vehicles equipped with a single-speed trans- use both of the front tow hooks to minimize (EARS) function. fer case have no NEUTRAL position, and the risk of damage to the vehicle. therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground. WARNING! EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) CAUTION! • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri- This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used ous injury or death. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR (if the remaining wheels are on the • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling is to record data that will assist in under- ground). Internal damage to the transmis- with tow hooks. Tow straps may become standing how a vehicle’s systems performed sion or transfer case will occur if a front or disengaged, causing serious injury. under certain crash or near crash-like situa- rear wheel lift is used when towing. tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit- • Towing this vehicle in violation of the CAUTION! ting a road obstacle. above requirements can cause severe Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- transmission and/or transfer case dam- Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to age. Damage from improper towing is rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not tems” in “Safety” for further information on not covered under the New Vehicle Lim- use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or high- the Event Data Recorder (EDR). ited Warranty. way towing. You could damage your vehicle.

223 224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING 3.0L Diesel Engine ...... 240 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 264 NON-SRT...... 226 Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine . .241 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 266 Maintenance Plan ...... 226 Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle...... 228 Engine...... 241 Non-SRT ...... 267 SCHEDULED SERVICING — Adding Washer Fluid ...... 241 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT. . .268 SRT...... 228 Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 242 Tire Rotation Recommendations .....268 Maintenance Plan ...... 229 DEALERSERVICE...... 242 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA- SCHEDULED SERVICING — Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 243 TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY DIESELENGINE...... 232 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 245 GRADES...... 269 Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To Cooling System ...... 248 Treadwear ...... 269 B5 Biodiesel ...... 233 Brake System ...... 249 Traction Grades ...... 269 Additional Maintenance — B6 To Automatic Transmission ...... 250 Temperature Grades...... 270 B20 Biodiesel ...... 235 RAISINGTHEVEHICLE...... 250 INTERIORS...... 270 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 236 Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 270 3.6L Engine ...... 236 TIRES...... 250 Plastic And Coated Parts...... 271 5.7L Engine ...... 237 Tire Safety Information ...... 250 Leather Parts...... 271 6.2L Supercharged Engine ...... 238 Tires — General Information ...... 259 Glass Surfaces ...... 271 6.4L Engine ...... 239 Tire Types ...... 263

225 SCHEDULED SERVICING erating conditions can cause the change Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: NON-SRT oil message to illuminate as early as • Check engine oil level. 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos- • Check windshield washer fluid level. oil change indicator system. The oil change sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). • Check the tire inflation pressures and look indicator system will remind you that it is for unusual wear or damage. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil time to take your vehicle in for scheduled change indicator message after completing • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, maintenance. the scheduled oil change. brake master cylinder and fill as needed. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil • Check function of all interior and exterior change indicator message will illuminate. NOTE: lights This means that service is required for your Under no circumstances should oil change vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre- intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), Maintenance Plan quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot twelve months or 350 hours of engine run or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours Required Maintenance usage will influence when the “Oil Change of engine run or idle time is generally only a Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the fol- Required” message is displayed. Severe op- concern for fleet customers. lowing pages for required maintenance. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

226 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if XXX X X X X necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer XXX X X X X towing. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. X X X X X Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs.** X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or XX 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Change transfer case fluid. X Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

227 NOTE: WARNING! SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT • The oil change indicator message will not • You can be badly injured working on or monitor the time since the last oil change. around a motor vehicle. Do only service The Scheduled Maintenance services listed Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six work for which you have the knowledge in this manual must be done at the times or months since your last oil change, even if and the right equipment. If you have any mileages specified to protect your vehicle the oil change indicator message is NOT doubt about your ability to perform a warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor- illuminated. mance and reliability. More frequent mainte- service job, take your vehicle to a com- • Change your engine oil more often if you nance may be needed for vehicles in severe petent mechanic. drive your vehicle off-road for an extended operating conditions, such as dusty areas and • Failure to properly inspect and maintain period of time. your vehicle could result in a component very short trip driving. Inspection and service malfunction and effect vehicle handling should also be done anytime a malfunction is • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) and performance. This could cause an suspected. or six months, whichever comes first. accident. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched- Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle scheduled maintenance. uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The instrument cluster display will display an Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) performed by someone other than your autho- “Oil Change Required” message and a single if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off rized dealer, the message can be reset by chime will sound, indicating that an oil change road environment or is operated predomi- referring to the steps described under “Instru- is necessary. nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Your Instrument Panel” in this guide. Duty. change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

228 At Each Stop For Fuel Once A Month At Each Oil Change • Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine • Check tire pressure and look for unusual • Change the engine oil filter. wear or damage. Compartment” in this section for further • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. information. • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten • Check the windshield washer solvent and the terminals as required. CAUTION! add if required. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser- voir, engine oil, brake master cylinder, and Failure to perform the required mainte- add as needed. nance items may result in damage to the vehicle. • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

Maintenance Plan

Miles: 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 144,000 150,000 Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers: 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 Change the engine oil and engine XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX before scheduled maintenance.

229 Miles: 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 144,000 150,000 Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers: 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road condi- XXXXXXXXXXXX tions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings; replace if XXXXXXXXXXXX necessary. Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc XXXXX brakes. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X Inspect the accessory drive belts XX replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, XXXXXX fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

230 Miles: 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 144,000 150,000 Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers: 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, XXXXXXXXXXXX wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. XXXXX Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X Inspect and replace the PCV Valve X if necessary Replace the spark plugs – XX 6.2L Supercharged Engine. ** Replace the spark plugs – X 6.4L Engine. ** Flush and replace the engine cool- ant at 120 months if not done at XX 150,000 miles (240,000 km).

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.

231 Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Engine Oil Filter Replacement WARNING! change indicator message will illuminate. Residual oil in the housing may spill from the This means that service is required for your • You can be badly injured working on or housing when the new filter is installed if the vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre- around a motor vehicle. Do only service residual oil is not either removed from the quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or work for which you have the knowledge housing or enough time has not elapsed to cold ambient temperatures will influence and the right equipment. If you have any allow the oil to drain back into the engine. when the “Oil Change Required” message doubt about your ability to perform a When servicing the oil filter on this engine, is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions service job, take your vehicle to a com- carefully remove the filter and use a suction will cause the change oil message to illumi- petent mechanic. gun to remove any residual oil left in the nate more frequently. Have your vehicle ser- • Failure to properly inspect and maintain housing or wait about 30 minutes for the oil viced as soon as possible, within the next your vehicle could result in a component to drain back into the engine. malfunction and effect vehicle handling 500 miles (805 km). Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: and performance. This could cause an Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change accident. indicator message after completing the sched- • Check engine oil level uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is • Check windshield washer fluid level performed by someone other than your autho- SCHEDULED SERVICING — • Check the tire inflation pressures and look

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE rized dealer, the message can be reset by for unusual wear or damage DIESEL ENGINE referring to the steps described under “Instru- ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser- Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic Your Instrument Panel” in this guide. voir, brake master cylinder, and fill as needed oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is NOTE: • Check function of all interior and exterior time to take your vehicle in for scheduled Under no circumstances should oil change lights maintenance. intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.

232 Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the follow- ing pages for required maintenance. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. • Drain water from fuel filter assembly. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change fuel filter.

233 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Inspections Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle XXX X X X X for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X Additional Maintenance Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. 20,000 miles (32 000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5. Replace engine air filter. X X X X X Replace the air conditioning filter. XXX X X X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or XX 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace accessory drive belt(s). X Change transfer case fluid. X

234 WARNING! Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Biodiesel • You can be badly injured working on or NOTE: around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge • Under no circumstances should oil change and the right equipment. If you have any intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km) doubt about your ability to perform a or six months, whichever comes first when service job, take your vehicle to a com- using Biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5). petent mechanic. • The owner is required to monitor mileage • Failure to properly inspect and maintain for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil your vehicle could result in a component change indicator system does not reflect malfunction and effect vehicle handling the use of biofuels. and performance. This could cause an • Fuel filter change interval is maintained at accident. every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.

235 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 — Engine Oil Filter Access 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

236 5.7L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

237 6.2L Supercharged Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

238 6.4L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal

239 3.0L Diesel Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Reservoir 4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

240 Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine Checking Oil Level — 3.0 Diesel Engine NOTE: It is possible for your oil level to be slightly To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's higher than a previous check. This would be engine, the engine oil must be maintained at engine, the engine oil must be maintained at due to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in the correct level. Check the oil level at regular the correct level. Check the oil level at regular the crankcase due to operation of the diesel intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best intervals. The best time to check the oil level particulate filter regeneration strategy. This time to check the engine oil level is about five is before starting the engine after it has been fuel will evaporate out under normal opera- minutes after a fully warmed up engine is parked overnight. When checking oil after tion. shut off. operating the engine, first ensure the engine Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level is at full operating temperature, then wait for Never operate the engine with oil level below ground will improve the accuracy of the oil five minutes after engine shutdown to check the “MIN” mark or above the upper “MAX” level readings. Always maintain the oil level the oil. mark. within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level Adding Washer Fluid one quart of oil when the reading is at the ground will improve the accuracy of the oil bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a The instrument cluster display will indicate level readings. Add oil only when the level on reading at the top of the safe zone on these when the washer fluid level is low. When the the dipstick is below the “MIN” mark. The engines. sensor detects a low fluid level, the wind- total capacity from the MIN mark to the MAX shield will light on the vehicle graphic outline mark is 1 qt (1 L). CAUTION! and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed. Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase CAUTION! will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers This could damage your engine. Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase and the rear window washer is shared. The will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pres- fluid reservoir is located in the engine com- sure. This could damage your engine. partment, be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-

241 shield washer solvent only (not radiator anti- freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser- WARNING! CAUTION! voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution • It is essential when replacing the cables cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper and can burn or even blind you. Do not on the battery that the positive cable is blades, this will help blade performance. To allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, attached to the positive post and the prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a negative cable is attached to the nega- system in cold weather, select a solution or battery when attaching clamps. If acid tive post. Battery posts are marked posi- mixture that meets or exceeds the tempera- splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi- ture range of your climate. This rating infor- area immediately with large amounts of fied on the battery case. Cable clamps mation can be found on most washer fluid water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce- should be tight on the terminal posts containers. dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for and free of corrosion. further information. • If a “fast charger” is used while the bat- WARNING! • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. tery is in the vehicle, disconnect both Keep flame or sparks away from the vehicle battery cables before connecting Commercially available windshield washer battery. Do not use a booster battery or the charger to the battery. Do not use a solvents are flammable. They could ignite any other booster source with an output “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. and burn you. Care must be exercised greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE when filling or working around the washer clamps to touch each other. solution. • Battery posts, terminals, and related ac- DEALER SERVICE cessories contain lead and lead com- Your authorized dealer has the qualified ser- Maintenance-Free Battery pounds. Wash hands after handling. vice personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance- manner. Service Manuals are available which free battery. You will never have to add water, include detailed service information for your nor is periodic maintenance required. vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be- fore attempting any procedure yourself.

242 NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control WARNING! CAUTION! systems may void your warranty and could result • Use only refrigerants and compressor Do not use chemical flushes in your air in civil penalties being assessed against you. lubricants approved by the manufac- conditioning system as the chemicals can turer for your air conditioning system. damage your air conditioning components. WARNING! Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- Such damage is not covered by the New mable and can explode, injuring you. Vehicle Limited Warranty. You can be badly injured working on or Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri- around a motor vehicle. Only do service cants can cause the system to fail, re- work for which you have the knowledge quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Air Conditioning Filter Replacement and the proper equipment. If you have any Information Book, for further warranty (A/C Air Filter) doubt about your ability to perform a ser- information. vice job, take your vehicle to a competent Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this sec- • The air conditioning system contains re- mechanic. tion for the proper maintenance intervals. frigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the WARNING! system, adding refrigerant or any repair Air Conditioner Maintenance requiring lines to be disconnected Do not remove the cabin air filter while the For best possible performance, your air con- should be done by an experienced tech- vehicle is running, or while the ignition is ditioner should be checked and serviced by nician. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the an authorized dealer at the start of each warm cabin air filter removed and the blower season. This service should include cleaning operating, the blower can contact hands of the condenser fins and a performance test. and may propel dirt and debris into your Drive belt tension should also be checked at eyes, resulting in personal injury. this time.

243 The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air 2. There are glove compartment travel stops ing. Disengage the mid way snap by pull- inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform on both sides of the glove compartment ing the door outward. Unhinge the filter the following procedure to replace the filter: door, partially close the glove compart- cover on the right side to fully remove the 1. Open the glove compartment and remove ment door and push inward to release the cover. all contents. glove compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side. 3. Pull the right hand side of the glove com- partment door toward the rear of the ve- hicle to disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges.

NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door from its hinges, there will be some resistance. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the glove compartment tension A/C Air Filter Cover tether and tether clip by sliding the clip Glove Compartment toward the face of the glove compartment 1 — Retaining Tab 2 — Mid Way Snap 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops door and lifting the clip out of glove com- 3 — Filter Cover Hinge 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether partment door. 3 — Glove Compartment Door 5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab and mid way snap that 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it secures the filter cover to the HVAC hous- straight out of the housing.

244 7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on Windshield Wiper Blades The wiper blades and wiper arms should be the filter pointing toward the floor. When inspected periodically, not just when wiper Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades installing the filter cover, make sure the performance problems are experienced. This and the windshield periodically with a sponge retaining tabs fully engage the cover. inspection should include the following or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. points: This will remove accumulations of salt or road CAUTION! • Wear Or Uneven Edges film. • Foreign Material The cabin air filter is identified with an Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long arrow to indicate airflow direction through periods may cause deterioration of the wiper • Hardening Or Cracking the filter. Failure to properly install the blades. Always use washer fluid when using • Deformation Or Fatigue filter will result in the need to replace it more often. the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, windshield. replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a 8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper the glove compartment door hinge and or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade arm or blade that is damaged. reattach the glove compartment tension rubber out of contact with petroleum prod- tether by inserting the tether clip in the Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compart- NOTE: CAUTION! ment door. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back pending on geographical area and frequency 9. Push the door to the near closed position against the glass without the wiper blade to reengage the glove compartment travel of use. Poor performance of blades may be in place or the glass may be damaged. stops. present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are NOTE: present, clean the wiper blades or replace as Ensure the glove compartment door hinges necessary. and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. 245 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade wiper blade and while holding the wiper separating the wiper blade from the wiper off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade arm with the other hand (move the wiper the full up position. down towards the base of the wiper arm. blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Position Unlocked Position 1 — Wiper 1 — Wiper Blade Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 2 — Release Tab 2 — Release Tab 1 — Wiper Blade 3 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Arm 2 — Release Tab 3 — Wiper Arm

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the the wiper blade from the wiper arm by 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. holding the wiper arm with one hand and 246 Installing The Front Wipers cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap- the wiper arm is in the full up position. ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tabopenandthebladesideofthewiper facing up and away from the windshield. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position its locked position. Latch engagement will 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap be accompanied by an audible click. 2 — Wiper Arm 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. 3 — Wiper Blade Rear Wiper Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away 2 — Wiper Arm arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper from the glass to allow the rear wiper 3 — Wiper Blade blade nearest to wiper arm with your right blade to be raised off of the glass. hand. With your left hand hold the wiper NOTE: arm as you pull the wiper blade away from The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. the wiper arm past its stop far enough to off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. 247 NOTE: Installing The Rear Wiper Cooling System Resistance will be accompanied by an 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from audible snap. the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be WARNING! 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper raised off of the glass. blade, move the wiper blade upward and • Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan away from the wiper arm to disengage. NOTE: motor lead before working near the ra- The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised diator cooling fan. off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot • You or others can be badly burned by hot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap- from your radiator. If you see or hear ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage steam coming from under the hood, do the vehicle. not open the hood until the radiator has 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the or coolant bottle is hot. opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab • Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry the bottom end of the wiper arm with one away from the radiator cooling fan when SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the hood is raised. The fan starts auto- the wiper arm until it snaps into place. matically and may start at any time, 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and whether the engine is running or not. • When working near the radiator cooling Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or 1 — Wiper Arm turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The 2 — Wiper Blade fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto mode. the glass.

248 recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en- light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring WARNING! tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE level within the designated marks on the side • You or others can be badly burned by hot COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin- from your radiator. If you see or hear der area before removing cap. With disc Brake System steam coming from under the hood, do brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as not open the hood until the radiator has In order to assure brake system performance, the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should had time to cool. Never try to open a all brake system components should be in- be checked when pads are replaced. If the cooling system pressure cap when the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the sys- radiator is hot. spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte- nance Plan” in this section for the proper tem for leaks. maintenance intervals. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni- Engine Coolant Checks cal Specifications” for further information. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec- WARNING! tion every 12 months (before the onset of WARNING! freezing weather, where applicable). If the Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the sys- • Use only manufacturer's recommended foot resting or riding on the brake pedal tem should be drained, flushed, and refilled brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri- can result in abnormally high brake tem- with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to cants” in “Technical Specifications” for peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos- MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check further information. Using the wrong sible brake damage. You would not have the front of the A/C condenser for any accu- type of brake fluid can severely damage your full braking capacity in an emergency. mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean your brake system and/or impair its per- by gently spraying water from a garden hose formance. The proper type of brake fluid vertically down the face of the condenser. Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder for your vehicle is also identified on the Check the engine cooling system hoses for The fluid level of the master cylinder should original factory installed hydraulic mas- brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, ter cylinder reservoir. tightness of the connection at the coolant or immediately if the brake system warning

249 WARNING! Automatic Transmission RAISING THE VEHICLE • To avoid contamination from foreign Fluid Level Check In the case where it is necessary to raise the matter or moisture, use only new brake The fluid level is preset at the factory and vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly does not require adjustment under normal station. closed container. Keep the master cylin- operating conditions. Routine fluid level der reservoir cap secured at all times. checks are not required; therefore the trans- TIRES Brake fluid in a open container absorbs mission has no dipstick. Your authorized Tire Safety Information moisture from the air resulting in a lower dealer can check your transmission fluid boiling point. This may cause it to boil level using special service tools. If you notice Tire safety information will cover aspects of unexpectedly during hard or prolonged fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, the following information: Tire Markings, Tire braking, resulting in sudden brake fail- visit your authorized dealer immediately to Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and ure. This could result in a collision. have the transmission fluid level checked. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid result in spilling brake fluid on hot en- level can cause severe transmission damage. gine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION! painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit surfaces. your authorized dealer immediately. Se- • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to vere transmission damage may occur. Your contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal authorized dealer has the proper tools to components could be damaged, causing adjust the fluid level accurately. partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

250 Tire Markings NOTE: • Temporary spare tires are designed for tem- porary emergency use only. Temporary high • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based pressure compact spare tires have the letter on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced- have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall ing the size designation. Example: T145/ preceding the size designation. Example: 80D18 103M. P215/65R15 95H. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on design standards and it begins with the European design standards. Tires designed tire diameter molded into the sidewall. to this standard have the tire size molded Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. into the sidewall beginning with the sec- Tire Markings tion width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/ 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum 65R15 96H. Safety Stan- Load • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is dards Code 5 — Maximum based on U.S. design standards. The size (TIN) Pressure designation for LT-Metric tires is the same 2 — Size as for P-Metric tires except for the letters 6 — Treadwear, “LT” that are molded into the sidewall Designation Traction and 3 — Service preceding the size designation. Example: Temperature LT235/85R16. Description Grades

251 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

252 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

253 Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black The TIN may be found on one or both sides of sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the tire; however, the date code may only be the TIN is not found on the outboard side, on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will then you will find it on the inboard side of the have the full TIN, including the date code, tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

254 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

255 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the: NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is 1. Number of people that can be carried in listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear the vehicle. edge of the driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. including the spare tire (if equipped), at least 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, monthly and inflate to the recommended rear, and spare tires. pressure for your vehicle. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire And Loading Information Placard inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Tire And Loading Information Placard

256 NOTE: (3) Subtract the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, the driver and passengers from XXX kg trailer, load from your trailer will be gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the or XXX lbs. transferred to your vehicle. Consult front and rear axles must not be exceeded. (4) The resulting figure equals the this manual to determine how this To determine the maximum loading condi- available amount of cargo and luggage reduces the available cargo and lug- tions of your vehicle, locate the statement gage load capacity of your vehicle. “The combined weight of occupants and load capacity. For example, if “XXX” cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there Metric Example For Load Limit on the Tire and Loading Information placard. will be five 150 lb passengers in your For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg The combined weight of occupants, cargo/ vehicle, the amount of available cargo and there will be five 68 kg passengers in luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli- and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. your vehicle, the amount of available cargo cable) should never exceed the weight refer- (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635- enced here. 340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight Limit— of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not (1) Locate the statement “The com- safely exceed the available cargo and bined weight of occupants and cargo luggage load capacity calculated in should never exceed XXX kg or Step 4. XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

257 NOTE: and towing capacities of your vehicle with • For the following example, the combined • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load varying seating configurations and number weight of occupants and cargo should never from your trailer will be transferred to your and size of occupants. This table is for illus- exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). vehicle. The following table shows examples tration purposes only and may not be accu- on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, rate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

258 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! • Unequal tire pressures from side to side • Underinflation increases tire flexing and Overloading of your tires is dangerous. may cause erratic and unpredictable steer- Overloading can cause tire failure, affect can result in overheating and tire failure. ing response. vehicle handling, and increase your stop- • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to ping distance. Use tires of the recom- cushion shock. Objects on the road and • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may mended load capacity for your vehicle. chuckholes can cause damage that re- cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Never overload them. sult in tire failure. Fuel Economy • Overinflated or underinflated tires can Tires — General Information affect vehicle handling and can fail sud- Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling Tire Pressure denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. resistance resulting in higher fuel consump- • Unequal tire pressures can cause steer- tion. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to ing problems. You could lose control of Tread Wear the safe and satisfactory operation of your your vehicle. vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by • Unequal tire pressures from one side of Improper cold tire inflation pressures can improper tire pressure: the vehicle to the other can cause the cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced • Safety and Vehicle Stability vehicle to drift to the right or left. tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire • Always drive with each tire inflated to replacement. • Economy the recommended cold tire inflation Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability • Tread Wear pressure. • Ride Comfort Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort- Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring Safety the stability of the vehicle and can produce a and uncomfortable ride. feeling of sluggish response or over respon- WARNING! Tire Inflation Pressures siveness in the steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous The proper cold tire inflation pressure is and can cause collisions. listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. 259 At least once a month: Check tire pressures more often if subject to reduced vehicle loading may be required for • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not pressures vary with temperature changes. authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- make a visual judgement when determining Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation proper inflation. Tires may look properly (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature pressures. inflated even when they are under-inflated. change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible WARNING! damage. Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F High speed driving with your vehicle under CAUTION! (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F maximum load is dangerous. The added (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure strain on your tires could cause them to After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which fail. You could have a serious collision. Do sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum This will prevent moisture and dirt from this outside temperature condition. capacity at continuous speeds above entering the valve stem, which could dam- 75 mph (120 km/h). age the valve stem. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT Radial Ply Tires Inflation pressures specified on the placard reduce this normal pressure build up or your are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire pressure will be too low. WARNING! tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Combining radial ply tires with other types for at least three hours, or driven less than The manufacturer advocates driving at safe of tires on your vehicle will cause your 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of speeds and within posted speed limits. vehicle to handle poorly. The instability three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure Where speed limits or conditions are such could cause a collision. Always use radial must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, ply tires in sets of four. Never combine sure molded into the tire sidewall. maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is them with other types of tires. very important. Increased tire pressure and 260 Tire Repair run flat mode it has limited driving capabili- ties and needs to be replaced immediately. WARNING! If your tire becomes damaged, it may be A Run Flat tire is not repairable. 30 seconds continuously when you are repaired if it meets the following criteria: stuck, and do not let anyone near a spin- • The tire has not been driven on when flat. It is not recommended driving a vehicle ning wheel, no matter what the speed. loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while • The damage is only on the tread section of a tire is in the run flat mode. Tread Wear Indicators your tire (sidewall damage is not repair- able). See the tire pressure monitoring section for Tread wear indicators are in the original more information. equipment tires to help you in determining • The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan when your tires should be replaced. inch (6 mm). Tire Spinning Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re- When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con- pairs and additional information. ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than have experienced a loss of pressure should be 30 seconds continuously without stopping. replaced immediately with another Run Flat Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In tire of identical size and service description Case Of Emergency” for further information. Tire Tread (Load Index and Speed Symbol). 1 — Worn Tire Run Flat Tires — If Equipped WARNING! 2 — New Tire Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after Forces generated by excessive wheel a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid speeds may cause tire damage or failure. These indicators are molded into the bottom loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat A tire could explode and injure someone. of the tread grooves. They will appear as mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster bands when the tread depth becomes a inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the 261 worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement WARNING! the “Tire Safety Information” section of this Tires” in this section for further information. result in sudden tire failure. You could lose manual for more information relating to the control and have a collision resulting in Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. Life Of Tire serious injury or death. It is recommended to replace the two front The service life of a tire is dependent upon Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just varying factors including, but not limited to: with as little exposure to light as possible. one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s • Driving style. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation and gasoline. sure that the wheel’s specifications match pressures can cause uneven wear patterns those of the original wheels. to develop across the tire tread. These ab- Replacement Tires It is recommended you contact your autho- normal wear patterns will reduce tread life, The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal- rized tire dealer or original equipment dealer resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- ance of many characteristics. They should be with any questions you may have on tire ment. inspected regularly for wear and correct cold specifications or capability. Failure to use • Distance driven. tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer equivalent replacement tires may adversely strongly recommends that you use tires affect the safety, handling, and ride of your SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically equivalent to the originals in size, quality and vehicle. have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these performance when replacement is needed. tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte- Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi- WARNING! nance is highly recommended. cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, WARNING! Certification Label for the size designation of or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol Tires and the spare tire should be replaced unapproved tires and wheels may for your tire will be found on the original after six years, regardless of the remaining change suspension dimensions and per- equipment tire sidewall. tread. Failure to follow this warning can formance characteristics, resulting in

262 Tire Types Summer tires do not contain the all season WARNING! designation or mountain/snowflake symbol changes to steering, handling, and brak- All Season Tires — If Equipped on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in ing of your vehicle. This can cause un- All Season tires provide traction for all sea- sets of four; failure to do so may adversely predictable handling and stress to steer- sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. ing and suspension components. You Traction levels may vary between different all could lose control and have a collision season tires. All season tires can be identified WARNING! resulting in serious injury or death. Use by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on only the tire and wheel sizes with load Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con- the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in ratings approved for your vehicle. ditions. You could lose vehicle control, • Never use a tire with a smaller load index sets of four; failure to do so may adversely resulting in severe injury or death. Driving or capacity, other than what was origi- affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. too fast for conditions also creates the nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped possibility of loss of vehicle control. tire with a smaller load index could re- sult in tire overloading and failure. You Summer tires provide traction in both wet Snow Tires could lose control and have a collision. and dry conditions, and are not intended to Some areas of the country require the use of • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can having adequate speed capability can equipped with Summer tires, be aware these be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” result in sudden tire failure and loss of tires are not designed for Winter or cold symbol on the tire sidewall. vehicle control. driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less If you need snow tires, CAUTION! than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with select tires equivalent in ice or snow. For more information, contact an size and type to the origi- nal equipment tires. Use Replacing original tires with tires of a authorized dealer. different size may result in false speedom- snow tires only in sets of eter and odometer readings. four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. 263 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Tire and Loading Information Placard located than what was originally equipped with your Residents) for further information. on the driver’s side door opening or on the vehicle and should not be operated at sus- sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de- tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For CAUTION! scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to preceding the size designation. Example: original equipment or an authorized tire dealer Because of the reduced ground clearance, T145/80D18 103M. for recommended safe operating speeds, load- do not take your vehicle through an auto- T,S=Temporary Spare Tire ing and cold tire inflation pressures. matic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to Since this tire has limited tread life, the While studded tires improve performance on the vehicle may result. original equipment tire should be repaired (or ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at surfaces may be poorer than that of non- Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire the first opportunity. studded tires. Some states prohibit studded And Wheel — If Equipped tires; therefore, local laws should be checked Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to before using these tire types. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare mount a conventional tire on the compact tire and wheel equivalent in look and func- spare wheel, since the wheel is designed Spare Tires — If Equipped tion to the original equipment tire and wheel specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Refer to the applicable section in the appro- found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. install more than one compact spare tire and priate chapter in the Owner’s Manual at This spare tire may be used in the tire rota- wheel on the vehicle at any given time. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html tion for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for WARNING! (Canadian Residents) for further information. the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact and collapsible spares are for For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit temporary emergency use only. With these instead of a spare tire, please refer to Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped spares, do not drive more than 50 mph “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” The compact spare is for temporary emer- (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ gency use only. You can identify if your ve- limited tread life. When the tread is worn en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- hicle is equipped with a compact spare by to the tread wear indicators, the temporary looking at the spare tire description on the 264 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to replaced. Since it is not the same as your WARNING! mount a conventional tire on the collapsible original equipment tire, replace (or repair) use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be spare wheel, since the wheel is designed the original equipment tire and reinstall on sure to follow the warnings, which apply to specifically for the collapsible spare tire. the vehicle at the first opportunity. your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle WARNING! Limited Use Spare — If Equipped control. The limited use spare tire is for temporary Compact and Collapsible spares are for emergency use only. This tire is identified by Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped temporary emergency use only. With these a label located on the limited use spare spares, do not drive more than 50 mph The collapsible spare is for temporary emer- wheel. This label contains the driving limita- (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- gency use only. You can identify if your ve- tions for this spare. This tire may look like the ited tread life. When the tread is worn to hicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by original equipped tire on the front or rear axle the tread wear indicators, the temporary of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of looking at the spare tire description on the use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Tire and Loading Information Placard located sure to follow the warnings, which apply to on the driver’s side door opening or on the your spare. Failure to do so could result in handling. Since it is not the same as your sidewall of the tire. spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con- original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on Collapsible spare tire description example: trol. the vehicle at the first opportunity. 165/80-17 101P. Full Size Spare — If Equipped Since this tire has limited tread life, the WARNING! original equipment tire should be repaired (or The full size spare is for temporary emer- replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at gency use only. This tire may look like the Limited use spares are for emergency use the first opportunity. originally equipped tire on the front or rear only. Installation of this limited use spare axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is tire may have limited tread life. When the do not drive more than the speed listed on properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated collapsible tire using the electric air pump to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on before lowering the vehicle. temporary use full size spare tire needs to be 265 use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They WARNING! can damage the wheel’s protective coating CAUTION! your Tire and Loading Information Placard that helps keep them from corroding and Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the tarnishing. bristle brush, metal polishes or oven rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace cleaner. These products may damage the (or repair) the original equipment tire at CAUTION! wheel's protective finish. Such damage is the first opportunity and reinstall it on your not covered by the New Vehicle Limited vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss Avoid products or automatic car washes Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar of vehicle control. that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar- mended. Wheel And Wheel TrimCare ket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective NOTE: All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi- finish. Such damage is not covered by the If you intend parking or storing your vehicle num and chrome plated wheels, should be New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car for an extended period after cleaning the cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and water to maintain their luster and to pre- equivalent is recommended. and apply the brakes to remove the water vent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same droplets from the brake components. This

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ- soap solution recommended for the body of the activity will remove the red rust on the brake ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken in vehicle. rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi- braking. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration cals and equipment to prevent damage to the caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom- road chemicals used to melt ice or control mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not

266 Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low • Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro Gloss Clear Coat Wheels or equivalent is recommended on P245/ CAUTION! 70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires. • Install device as tightly as possible and CAUTION! then retighten after driving about ½ mile WARNING! (0.8 km). If your vehicle is equipped with these • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel Using tires of different size and type (M+S, • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com- Snow) between front and rear axles can and large bumps, especially with a pounds. They will permanently damage cause unpredictable handling. You could loaded vehicle. this finish and such damage is not covered lose control and have a collision. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. dry pavement. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP • Observe the traction device manufactur- AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used CAUTION! er’s instructions on the method of instal- on a regular basis; this is all that is re- To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, lation, operating speed, and conditions quired to maintain this finish. observe the following precautions: for use. Always use the suggested oper- • Because of restricted traction device ating speed of the device manufacturer’s clearance between tires and other sus- if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — Non-SRT pension components, it is important that • Do not use traction devices on a com- pact spare tire. Use of traction devices require sufficient tire- only traction devices in good condition to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- are used. Broken devices can cause se- dations to guard against damage. rious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi- ately if noise occurs that could indicate • Traction device must be of proper size for device breakage. Remove the damaged the tire, as recommended by the traction parts of the device before further use. device manufacturer. • Install on Rear Tires Only

267 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) — SRT CAUTION! Tire Rotation Recommendations Use of traction devices require sufficient tire- pension components, it is important The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- that only traction devices in good condi- operate at different loads and perform differ- dations to guard against damage. tion are used. Broken devices can cause ent steering, handling, and braking func- tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal • Traction device must be of proper size for serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme- rates. the tire, as recommended by the traction diately if noise occurs that could indi- device manufacturer. cate device breakage. Remove the dam- These effects can be reduced by timely rota- aged parts of the device before further tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are • Install on Rear Tires Only use. especially worthwhile with aggressive tread • Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 or • Install device as tightly as possible and designs such as those on On/Off-Road type Equivalent is recommended on 295/45R20 then retighten after driving about ½ mile tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to tires. (0.8 km). maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. WARNING! • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the Using tires of different size and type loaded vehicle. proper maintenance intervals. More frequent

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles • Do not drive for a prolonged period on rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons can cause unpredictable handling. You dry pavement. for any rapid or unusual wear should be could lose control and have a collision. • Observe the traction device manufactur- corrected prior to rotation being performed. er’s instructions on the method of instal- NOTE: CAUTION! lation, operating speed, and conditions The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will for use. Always use the suggested oper- automatically locate the pressure values dis- To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, ating speed of the device manufacturer’s played in the correct vehicle position following observe the following precautions: if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). a tire rotation. • Because of restricted traction device • Do not use traction devices on a com- clearance between tires and other sus- pact spare tire.

268 The suggested rotation method is the “rearward- All passenger vehicle tires must con- Traction Grades cross” shown in the following diagram. form to Federal safety requirements in The Traction grades, from highest to addition to these grades. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Treadwear grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured The Treadwear grade is a comparative under controlled conditions on speci- rating, based on the wear rate of the fied government test surfaces of as- tire when tested under controlled con- phalt and concrete. A tire marked C ditions on a specified government test may have poor traction performance. Tire Rotation course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half WARNING! DEPARTMENT OF times as well on the government The traction grade assigned to course as a tire graded 100. The rela- TRANSPORTATION this tire is based on straight-ahead tive performance of tires depends UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY braking traction tests, and does not upon the actual conditions of their include acceleration, cornering, hy- GRADES use, however, and may depart signifi- droplaning, or peak traction charac- The following tire grading categories cantly from the norm due to variations teristics. were established by the National High- in driving habits, service practices, way Traffic Safety Administration. The and differences in road characteristics specific grade rating assigned by the and climate. tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

269 Seat Belt Maintenance Temperature Grades WARNING! The Temperature grades are A (the Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with The temperature grade for this tire highest), B, and C, representing the chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This is established for a tire that is prop- tire's resistance to the generation of will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex- weaken the fabric. heat and its ability to dissipate heat, cessive speed, under-inflation, or If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap when tested under controlled condi- excessive loading, either separately tions on a specified indoor laboratory solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove or in combination, can cause heat the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry test wheel. buildup and possible tire failure. with a soft cloth. Sustained high temperature can cause Replace the belts if they appear frayed or the material of the tire to degenerate INTERIORS worn or if the buckles do not work properly. and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire Seats And Fabric Parts WARNING! failure. The grade C corresponds to a Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol- A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE stery and carpeting. level of performance, which all pas- collision and leave you with no protection. senger vehicle tires must meet under Inspect the belt system periodically, check- the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- WARNING! ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning disassemble or modify the system. Seat purposes. Many are potentially flam- sent higher levels of performance on belt assemblies must be replaced after a mable, and if used in closed areas they the laboratory test wheel, than the collision if they have been damaged (i.e., may cause respiratory harm. minimum required by law. bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

270 Plastic And Coated Parts Leather Parts CAUTION! Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom- mended for leather upholstery. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based CAUTION! and/or Ketone based cleaning products to Your leather upholstery can be best preserved clean leather seats, as damage to the seat • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. may result. repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco- and damage the leather upholstery and Glass Surfaces rated surfaces of the interior may cause should be removed promptly with a damp permanent damage. Wipe away immedi- cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a ately. with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or • Damage caused by these type of prod- should be taken to avoid soaking your leather any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. ucts may not be covered by your New upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use Use caution when cleaning the inside rear Vehicle Limited Warranty. polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de- window equipped with electric defrosters or tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean windows equipped with radio antennas. Do Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses your leather upholstery. Application of a not use scrapers or other sharp instruments leather conditioner is not required to main- The lenses in front of the instruments in this that may scratch the elements. tain the original condition. vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to NOTE: cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are avoid scratching the plastic. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric mirror. solution may be used, but do not use high dye transfer more so than darker colors. The alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If leather is designed for easy cleaning, and soap is used, wipe clean with a clean FCA recommends Mopar total care leather damp cloth. cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather 2. Dry with a soft cloth. seats as needed. 271 272 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 274 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — Vehicle Identification Number ...... 274 DIESEL ENGINE ...... 277 SRT...... 283 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Diesel Fuel Specifications ...... 278 Engine...... 283 SPECIFICATIONS...... 275 FLUID CAPACITIES — NON SRT . .279 Chassis ...... 283 Torque Specifications...... 275 FLUIDCAPACITIES—SRT.....279 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 284 GASOLINEENGINE...... 276 FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL . . .280 Engine...... 284 3.6L Engine ...... 276 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — Chassis ...... 285 5.7L Engine ...... 276 NON-SRT...... 281 MOPARACCESSORIES...... 286 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . .277 Engine...... 281 Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....286 Materials Added To Fuel ...... 277 Chassis ...... 282

273 IDENTIFICATION DATA

Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind- shield. This number also is stamped on the right front floor, behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. This num- ber also appears on the Automobile Informa- tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient VIN Location Right Front Body VIN Location

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment. NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

274 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE **Use only your authorized dealer recom- mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove SPECIFICATIONS any dirt or oil before tightening. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re- or loose particles. moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern calibrated torque wrench using a high quality until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way). Torque Specifications NOTE: Base Model Vehicle If in doubt about the correct tightness, have Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ them checked with a torque wrench by your Torque Pattern Bolt Size Bolt Socket authorized dealer or service station. Size 130 Ft-Lbs After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/ WARNING! M14x1.50 22mm (176 N·m) bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/ To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off bolts are properly seated against the wheel. the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully SRT Model Vehicle until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ to follow this warning may result in per- Bolt Size Bolt Socket sonal injury. Size 110 Ft-Lbs M14x1.50 22mm (149 N·m)

275 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- While operating on gasoline with an octane ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound GASOLINE ENGINE and may void or not be covered by the New from the engine is not a cause for concern. 3.6L Engine Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, if the engine is heard making a Poor quality gasoline can cause problems heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- greater than 15% in this engine. tions. If you experience these symptoms, try ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure These engines are de- another brand of gasoline before considering and may void or not be covered by the New signed to meet all service for the vehicle. Vehicle Limited Warranty. emissions regulations 5.7L Engine Poor quality gasoline can cause problems and provide optimum such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- fuel economy and per- Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends tions. If you experience these symptoms, try formance when using greater than 15% in this engine. another brand of gasoline before considering high quality unleaded This engine is de- service for the vehicle. “Regular” gasoline TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS signed to meet all having a posted octane number of 87 as emissions regulations specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of and provide satisfac- higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not re- tory fuel economy and quired, as it will not provide any benefit over performance when us- “Regular” gasoline in these engines. ing high-quality un- While operating on gasoline with an octane leaded gasoline having number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by from the engine is not a cause for concern. the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane However, if the engine is heard making a “Plus” gasoline is recommended for opti- mum performance and fuel economy. heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

276 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine Poor quality gasoline can cause problems FUEL REQUIREMENTS – such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends tions. If you experience these symptoms, try DIESEL ENGINE greater than 15% in this engine. another brand of gasoline before considering Federal law requires that you must fuel this These engines are de- service for the vehicle. vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel signed to meet all Materials Added ToFuel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits emissions regulations, the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel provide optimal fuel Designated TOP TIER (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage economy and perfor- Detergent Gasoline to the emissions control system. mance when using contains a higher level high-quality unleaded of detergents to further Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable “Premium” gasoline aide in minimizing en- supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round having a posted octane number of 91 as gine and fuel system deposits. When avail- service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline (formerly known as the American Society 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for Testing and Materials) specification required in these engines. for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline D-975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor- Retailers. mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme While operating on gasoline with the required cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to octane number, hearing a light knocking Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning operate at colder-than-normal conditions for sound from the engine is not a cause for agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish re- prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 die- concern. However, if the engine is heard moval may contain active solvents or similar sel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with making a heavy knocking sound, see your ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas- 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a ket and diaphragm materials. better protection from fuel gelling or wax- lower than recommended octane number can plugging of the fuel filters. cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

277 NOTE: WARNING! CAUTION! • If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” re- gasoline on your diesel vehicle, do not start blending agent. They can be unstable un- mains on, DO NOT START engine before the engine. Damage to the engine and fuel der certain conditions and hazardous or you drain the water from the fuel filter(s) system could occur. Please call your autho- explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. to avoid engine damage. Refer to rized dealer for service. “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in • A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting “Servicing And Maintenance” in your Die- Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of wa- ASTM specification D-975 may be used sel Supplement at www.mopar.com/en-us/ ter. To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the with your diesel engine without any adjust- accumulated water from the fuel/water sepa- care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) ments to regular service schedules. rator using the fuel/water separator drain pro- or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Resi- • Commercially available fuel additives are vided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy dents) for further information. not necessary for the proper operation of good quality fuel and follow the cold weather your diesel engine. advice above, fuel conditioners should not Diesel Fuel Specifications be required in your vehicle. If available in • No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel This diesel engine has been developed to only be used where extended arctic condi- fuel may offer improved cold-starting and take advantage of the high energy content tions (-10°F or -23°C) exist. warm-up performance. and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel fuels.

278 FLUID CAPACITIES — NON SRT U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters 5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters 5.7L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters Cooling System* 3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters equivalent) 5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package 5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 6.2 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 8.3 Quarts 7.8 Liters 6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

279 U.S. Metric Cooling System* 6.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 6.2L Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile 4.0 Quarts 3.9 Liters Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that 16 Quarts 15.5 Liters meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL U.S. Metric

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Fuel (Approximate) 3.0L Diesel Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 8 Gallons 30.3 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API CJ-4) 8 Quarts 7.7 Liters Cooling System 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (Mopar Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology))

280 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85). Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) gine coolant is different and should not the cooling system in an emergency, the other than specified Organic Additive be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive cooling system will need to be drained, Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti- Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool- freeze), may result in engine damage freeze) or any “globally compatible” ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an and may decrease corrosion protection. coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine authorized dealer as soon as possible. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into

281 CAUTION! CAUTION! • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based • This vehicle has not been designed for engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do use with propylene glycol-based engine not use additional rust inhibitors or an- coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene tirust products, as they may not be com- glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) patible with the radiator engine coolant is not recommended. and may plug the radiator.

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier. Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

282 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufac- turer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Selec-Track) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) modifier. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

283 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). Engine Oil We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar or Shell Rotella that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CJ-4 engine oil category is required. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters. Fuel Filters We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. Fuel Selection Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS the emissions control system. For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.

284 NOTE: fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging at colder-than-normal conditions for pro- of the fuel filters. longed periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353. Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) additive. Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

285 MOPAR ACCESSORIES The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar Authentic Accessories By Mopar featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe- In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain cifically for your Jeep Grand Cherokee. far more than expressive style, premium pro- tection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.

EXTERIOR: • Front End Cover • Window Air Deflectors • Molded Splash Guards • Wheels • Skid Plates • Tow Hooks • Tubular Side Steps • Hitch Receiver • Front Air Deflector TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR: • Carpet Floor Mats • Katzkin Leather Interiors • Cargo Net • All-weather Floor Mats • Footwell Lighting • Bright Pedal Kit • Cargo Barrier • Molded Cargo Tray • Door Sill Guards

286 ELECTRONICS: • Remote Start • Mopar Connect • Rear View Camera • Park Distance Sensors

CARRIERS: • Sport Utility Bars • Roof Box Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof Mount Water Sports Carrier • Roof Mount Cargo Basket and Cargo Net

For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso- NOTE: ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or All parts are subject to availability. online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.

287 288 MULTIMEDIA

MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY ...... 291 Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER NAV)...... 298 OFFROADPAGES— CONTROL...... 320 IFEQUIPPED...... 292 Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Audio Jack (AUX) ...... 321 Account ...... 298 Off Road Pages Status Bar ...... 292 USB Port ...... 321 Built-In Features ...... 298 Vehicle Dynamics ...... 293 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 321 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .301 Suspension ...... 293 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTER- Pitch And Roll — If Equipped ...... 294 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH TAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM — Accessory Gauges ...... 294 DISPLAY ...... 304 IF EQUIPPED ...... 321 Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ...... 294 Uconnect 4 At A Glance ...... 304 Getting Started ...... 322 TIPS CONTROLS AND Personalized Menu Bar...... 306 Dual Video Screen...... 323 GENERAL INFORMATION .....295 Radio ...... 307 Blu-ray Disc Player ...... 323 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 295 Android Auto ...... 308 Play Video Games ...... 325 Reception Conditions...... 295 Apple CarPlay Integration ...... 309 Accessibility — If Equipped...... 325 Care And Maintenance ...... 296 UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV NAVIGATION...... 326 Anti-Theft Protection ...... 296 WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY ...... 310 Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .310 Volume ...... 326 IFEQUIPPED...... 296 Personalized Menu Bar...... 312 Finding Points Of Interest ...... 328 SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped Radio ...... 313 Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . .328 (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) .....296 Android Auto ...... 314 One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .328 SiriusXM Guardian Activation ...... 297 Apple CarPlay Integration ...... 317 Setting Your Home Location...... 328 Download The Uconnect App ...... 298 Home ...... 329 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 320 Adding A Stop ...... 329 289 Taking A Detour ...... 329 Using Do Not Disturb ...... 337 Register (4C NAV) ...... 344 SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) .....330 Incoming Text Messages ...... 338 Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) . .344 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 330 Helpful Tips And Common Questions Mobile App (4C NAV)...... 345 UCONNECT PHONE ...... 331 To Improve Bluetooth Performance SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 345 With Your Uconnect System ...... 339 Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Apple CarPlay — If Equipped...... 346 Calling) ...... 331 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 346 MULTIMEDIA Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your QUICKTIPS...... 339 General Information...... 347 Mobile Phone To The Uconnect Introducing Uconnect ...... 339 Additional Information ...... 347 System ...... 333 Get Started ...... 339 Common Phone Commands (Examples) ...... 336 Basic Voice Commands...... 340 Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone Radio ...... 341 During Call ...... 336 Media ...... 341 Transfer Ongoing Call Between Phone ...... 342 Handset And Vehicle ...... 336 Climate (4C/4C NAV) ...... 343 Phonebook ...... 336 Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 343 Voice Command Tips ...... 337 SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — Changing The Volume ...... 337 If Equipped...... 344

290 NOTE: CYBERSECURITY WARNING! • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and • It is not possible to know or to predict all directly regarding software updates. may be equipped with both wired and wire- of the possible outcomes if your vehi- • To help further improve vehicle security and less networks. These networks allow your ve- cle’s systems are breached. It may be minimize the potential risk of a security hicle to send and receive information. This possible that vehicle systems, including breach, vehicle owners should: information allows systems and features in safety related systems, could be im- – your vehicle to function properly. paired or a loss of vehicle control could Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/ occur that may result in an accident software-update to learn about available Your vehicle may be equipped with certain Uconnect software updates. security features to reduce the risk of unau- involving serious injury or death. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, – Only connect and use trusted media thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys- or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, tems and wireless communications. Vehicle trusted source. Media of unknown origin USBs, CDs). software technology continues to evolve over could possibly contain malicious soft- Privacy of any wireless and wired communica- time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup- ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps may increase the possibility for vehicle tions cannot be assured. Third parties may as needed. Similar to a computer or other systems to be breached. unlawfully intercept information and private devices, your vehicle may require software • As always, if you experience unusual communications without your consent. For fur- updates to improve the usability and perfor- vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to ther information, refer to “Data Collection & mance of your systems or to reduce the po- your nearest authorized dealer immedi- Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac- ately. in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement cess to your vehicle systems. and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your In- The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html the most recent version of vehicle software (U.S. Residents) www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- (such as Uconnect software) is installed. dian Residents). 291 OFF ROAD PAGES — Off Road Pages has the following selectable IF EQUIPPED pages: • Vehicle Dynamics Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road Pages, which provides the vehicle status • Suspension while operating on off road conditions. It • Pitch and Roll — If Equipped supplies information relating to the vehicle

MULTIMEDIA ride height, the status of the transfer case, • Accessory Gauge the pitch and roll of the vehicle (if equipped), • Selec-Terrain — If Equipped and the active Selec-Terrain mode. To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps” Off Road Pages Status Bar button on the touchscreen, and then select The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located Status Bar “Off Road Pages”. along the bottom of Off Road Pages and is 1 — Transfer Case Status (Only when present in each of the five selectable page in 4WD LOW) options. It provides continually updating in- 2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped formation for the following items: 3 — Current Latitude/Longitude • Current Transfer Case Status (only appears 4 — Current Altitude when in 4WD LOW) 5 — Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Status and Set Speed • Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped • Current Latitude/Longitude • Current Altitude of the vehicle • Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control Main Menu and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h) 1 — Off Road Pages App 2 — Uconnect Apps Button

292 Vehicle Dynamics Suspension The Vehicle Dynamics page displays informa- The Suspension page displays information tion concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. concerning the vehicle’s suspension. The following information is displayed: The following information is displayed: • Steering angle in degrees • Suspension Articulation Indicator • Status of Transfer case • Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped • Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped – Normal – Off Road 1 – Off Road 2 – Entry/Exit Suspension Menu – Aero 1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator 2 — Current Ride Height NOTE: The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen will switch to the appropriate height and the Suspension Vehicle Dynamics Menu Articulation Indicator will show the move- ment and change in height. 1 — Steering Angle 2 — Transfer Case Status 3 — Rear Axle Locker Status

293 Pitch And Roll — If Equipped Accessory Gauges Selec-Terrain — If Equipped The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehi- The Accessory Gauges page displays the The Selec-Terrain page displays the current cle’s current pitch (angle up and down) and current status of the vehicle’s Coolant Tem- Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution roll (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch perature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will and roll gauges provide a visualization of the Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature, alter the image on the screen. The vehicle current vehicle angle. and Battery Voltage. must be in the ON/RUN position to display

MULTIMEDIA Selec-Terrain information. The selectable modes are as follows: • Snow • Sand • Auto — Default • Mud • Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel Drive Low

Pitch And Roll Menu Accessory Gauges Menu 1 — Current Pitch 1 — Coolant Temperature 2 — Current Roll 2 — Oil Temperature 3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only) 4 — Battery Voltage 5 — Transmission Temperature

294 NOTE: TIPS CONTROLS AND Left Switch While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off Road GENERAL INFORMATION • Push the switch up or down to search for Pages Status Bar will also display the current the next listenable station or select the next Selec-Terrain mode. Steering Wheel Audio Controls or previous CD track. The steering wheel audio controls are located • Push the button in the center to select the on the rear surface of the steering wheel. next preset station (radio) or to change CDs if equipped with a CD Player. Reception Conditions Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially when you are far away from the broadcaster. Current Selec-Terrain Mode The volume may be increased when receiving traffic alerts and news. Steering Wheel Audio Controls

Right Switch • Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume. • Push the button in the center to change modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.

295 Care And Maintenance electronic control unit (Body Computer) is SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership replaced, the system will ask the user to enter and driving experience. When connected to Observe the following precautions to ensure the secret code. See an authorized dealer for an operable network, you can: the system is fully operational: further information. • Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian • The display lens should not come into con- operator who can connect you to emergency tact with pointed or rigid objects which SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — responders. could damage its surface; use a soft, dry MULTIMEDIA IF EQUIPPED • Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start anti-static cloth to clean and do not press. your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using • Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped the SiriusXM Guardian App from your de- clean the display lens. (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) vice. You can also do so by logging into your owner site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian • Prevent any liquid from entering the sys- Care when your vehicle has an operable tem: this could damage it beyond repair. WARNING! network connection. Services can only be Anti-Theft Protection ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- used where coverage is available. tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with • Receive text or email notifications if your The system is equipped with an anti-theft your hands on the steering wheel. You have vehicle's security alarm goes off. protection system based on the exchange of full responsibility and assume all risks information with the electronic control unit related to the use of the features and • Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using (Body Computer) on the vehicle. applications in this vehicle. Only use the GPS technology to help authorities locate features and applications when it is safe to your vehicle if it is stolen. This guarantees maximum safety and prevents do so. Failure to do so may result in an • Get operator assistance using the ASSIST the secret code from being entered after the accident involving serious injury or death. button on your interior rearview mirror. power supply has been disconnected. If the check has a positive outcome, the NOTE: system will start to operate, whereas if the Your vehicle may be transmitting data as comparison codes are not the same or if the authorized by the subscriber.

296 Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the Included Trial Period For New Vehicles Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services. just a few examples of things you’ll be able Your new vehicle may come with an included to do: 1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian located on your rearview mirror. The AS- services starting at the date of vehicle pur- • Know that help, if you need it, is only a SIST button is used for contacting Road- chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica- button press away with Assist. side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, • Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The you must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. hundreds of miles away. SOS Call button connects you to a After the trial period, if you wish to continue • Find your vehicle, no matter where you SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can your SiriusXM Guardian services you can parked, using the convenient Vehicle connect you to emergency services. choose to purchase a subscription. Finder function. 2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is lo- SiriusXM Guardian Activation • Use Send & Go to send a navigation route cated in the center of the menu bar of the from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s radio touchscreen. This is where you can To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM navigation system. manage your Apps. Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services. For further information:. 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your • U.S. residents visit: the left side of your steering wheel. These in-vehicle touchscreen. www.siriusxm.com/guardian buttons let you use your voice to give 2. Select the Activate Services icon from • Canadian residents visit: commands, make phone calls, send and your list of apps. www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca receive text messages hands-free, enter navigation destinations, and control your 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a radio and media devices. SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.

297 Download The Uconnect App • Press the “Remote” button on the bottom Maintaining YourSiriusXM Guardian menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re- Account You’re only a few steps away from using remote mote Start (if equipped), and activate your commands and other valuable services. horn and lights remotely. Selling Your Vehicle • Press the “Location” button on the bottom When you sell your vehicle, we recommend menu bar of the app to bring up a map to that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian locate your vehicle or send a location to MULTIMEDIA Account information from the vehicle. You can your vehicle’s navigation system. do this by pressing the ASSIST button in your • Press the menu button (three horizontal vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or lines) in the upper left corner of the app to call: access settings and support information. • U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827 Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C NAV) • Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091 Subscriptions can be purchased online by Built-In Features logging into your owner account. If you need help push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care WARNING! or: Mobile App ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on • U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827 the wheel. You have full responsibility and To use the Uconnect App: • Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091 assume all risks related to the use of the • Search for and download the Uconnect app Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian from the store on your compatible iPhone or services, and applications in this vehicle. Android powered device. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM • Log in to the app using the email address Guardian services when it is safe to do so. and password you created when you acti- Failure to do so may result in an accident vated the services. involving serious injury or death.

298 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! Your vehicle may be transmitting data as • If anyone in the vehicle could be in • ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- authorized by the subscriber. danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, tion to the road. Some features are lim- 1. ASSIST Call (4C NAV) — The rearview mirror dangerous road conditions or location), ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some contains an ASSIST button, allowing you to do not wait for voice contact from a SOS services, including SOS, will NOT work speak to a call center agent for support: Call operator. All occupants should exit without a subscription and an operable the vehicle immediately and move to a network connection. • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could safe location. • The SOS Call system is embedded into mean you may not have SOS Call service if the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not needed. If the rearview mirror light is add aftermarket electrical equipment to illuminated, have an authorized dealer the vehicle’s electrical system. This may service the SOS Call system immediately. • The Occupant Restraint Controller prevent your vehicle from sending a sig- (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning nal to initiate an emergency call. To Light on the instrument panel if a mal- avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add after- function is detected in any part of the SOS Call Button And ASSIST airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile Light is illuminated, the air bag system radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to 1 — SOS Call Button may not be working properly and the your vehicle’s electrical system or 2 — ASSIST Button SOS Call system may not send a signal to modify the antennas on your vehicle. • IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY a SOS Call operator if an air bag is Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD- • deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con- ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- illuminated, have an authorized dealer nected to someone who can help any- DENT), the Uconnect features, apps, service your vehicle immediately. time. Additional fees may apply. Addi- and SiriusXM Guardian services, among tional information in this section. others, will not operate.

299 • Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for help from local police, fire or ambulance 3. Theft Alarm Notification — The Theft Alarm Uconnect Apps and Features. personnel. If this button is accidentally Notification feature notifies you via email pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s • SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call factory-installed security alarm system support for SiriusXM Guardian services. button again or press the “Cancel” button has been set-off. There are a number of • Vehicle Care — Total support for your shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec- reasons why your alarm may have been FCA US LLC vehicle.

MULTIMEDIA onds has passed, the SOS call will be triggered, one of which could be that your placed and only the SOS Call operator can vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the NOTE: cancel it. The LED light on the rearview details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to you, we may record and monitor your conver- mirror will turn green once a connection to service below. When you activate, Theft sations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect a SOS Call operator has been made. The Alarm Notification is automatically set to Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care, green LED light will turn off once the SOS send you an email at the email address whether such conversations are initiated Call is terminated. Have an authorized you provide should the alarm go off. You through the SiriusXM Guardian services in your dealer service the vehicle if the rearview may also opt to have a text message sent vehicle, your device, or via a landline device, mirror light is continuously red. On to your device. and may share information obtained through equipped vehicles, this feature requires a 4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle such recording and monitoring in accordance functioning electrical system, a subscrip- is stolen, contact local law enforcement with regulatory requirements. You acknowl- tion, and an operable network connection. immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. edge, agree, and consent to any recording, If a connection is made between a SOS Call Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM monitoring or sharing of information obtained operator and your vehicle, you understand Guardian Care can help locate your ve- through any such call recordings. and agree that SOS Call operators will hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent 2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The stay on the line, even after you connect will ask for the stolen vehicle report num- rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but- with emergency services. The Emergency ber issued by local law enforcement. As ton that, when pressed, may place a call services operator may, like any other long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian emergency call, record conversations and Guardian subscription and an operable Care operator, who can connect you to sounds in and near your vehicle upon network connection, the agent may be emergency service operators, to request connection. able to locate the stolen vehicle and work 300 with law enforcement to help recover it. e. Create a myVehicle account or log in to UconnectPhone.com to determine if your Your vehicle must have an operable net- your existing one. device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine if your work connection and must be registered f. Select and purchase the desired sub- device is compatible. with SiriusXM Guardian with an active scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot subscription that includes the applicable will activate after a few minutes. U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or feature. call 1-877-855-8400. For additional assistance, call AT&T 5. 4G Wi—Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows Customer Care at: 866-595-1330 Canadian residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca you and your passengers to connect their or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi NOTE: call:1-800-387-9983 (French). capabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur- Your vehicle must have a working electrical Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM provides the ability to start the engine on your of an Internet-enabled portable device. Guardian services to operate. vehicle, without the keys and from virtually a. Select Wi-Fi Hotspot located under SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features any distance. You can send a request to your the Uconnect “Apps” menu. vehicle in one of two ways: If you own a compatible iPhone or Android b. Select the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot option powered device, the Uconnect App allows 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- from the touchscreen to locate your you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, ible device. Hotspot Name and Password. start your engine or activate your horn and 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. c. From your portable device Wi-Fi set- lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle • After 15 minutes if you have not en- tings menu, select the Hotspot Name must be equipped with remote start, must tered your vehicle with the key, the from the list of available networks and have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and engine will shut off automatically. enter the provided Password. must have an operable network connection. Services can only be used where coverage is • You can also send a command to turn- d. Open the web browser on your portable available. You can download the App from off an engine that has been remote device and enter the following web started. Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store address: www.att.com/myvehicleaccount. (iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit 301 • This remote function requires your ve- ally any distance. You can send a request to Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a hicle to be equipped with a factory- your vehicle in one of three ways: vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking installed Remote Start system. To uti- 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- area by activating the horn and lights. It may lize this feature after the Uconnect App ible device. also help if you need to draw attention to your is downloaded, login with your user vehicle for any reason. You can send a re- name and password. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. quest to your vehicle in one of three ways: 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care MULTIMEDIA To use this feature after the Uconncet App is 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- downloaded, login using your user name and on the phone. ible device. password. You will need your four digit To use this feature after the Uconnect App 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm is downloaded, login using your user name 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care the request. Press the “remote start” icon on and password. You will need your four digit on the phone. your Uconnect App to remotely start the ve- SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm the hicle. request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your To use this feature after the Uconnect App is You can set-up notifications for your account to Uconnect App to lock the doors, and press the downloaded, login using your user name and receive an email or text (SMS) message every “open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door. password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner You can set-up notifications for your account to the request. You can set-up notifications for Connect at moparownerconnect.com and receive an email or text (SMS) message every your account to receive an email or text click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner (SMS) message every time a command is Guardian Notifications. Connect at moparownerconnect.com and sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature pro- moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Guardian Notifications. vides the ability to lock or unlock the door on Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifi- your vehicle, without the keys and from virtu- cations.

302 Vehicle Finder Send & Go The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile App allows you to find the location of Mobile App allows you to search for a desti- your vehicle when you can't remember where nation on your mobile device and then send it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga- flash the lights to make finding your vehicle tion system. even easier. To send a navigation route to your vehicle: To find your vehicle: 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile App bottom bar. Mobile App bottom bar. 2. Either type in the destination you would 2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the like to navigate to, or search through one location of your vehicle. of the categories provided. 3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap- 3. Select the destination you want to route to pears, once your vehicle is located. from the list that appears. 4. Select your preferred Navigation App to 4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and route a path to your vehicle. then confirm the destination by pressing “Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. 5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve- hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on the pop-up that appears on the touch- screen, when the vehicle is started.

303 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY Uconnect 4 At A Glance MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Screen

NOTE: Setting The Time CAUTION! Uconnect screen images are for illustration • For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- Do NOT attach any object to the touch- press the time display at the top of the ware for your vehicle. screen, doing so can result in damage to screen. Press “Yes.” the screen.

304 • If the time is not displayed at the top of the • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or Loudness screen, press the “Settings” button on the “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or • Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate the “Time & Date” button on the touch- the Balance/Fade. this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound screen, then check or uncheck this option. Equalizer quality at lower volumes improves. • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- AUX Volume Offset Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. screen to activate the Equalizer screen. • Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on • If these features are not available, uncheck • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol- the Sync Time box. screen, or press and drag over the level bar ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out for each of the equalizer bands. The level is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–” of the Clock Setting screen. value, which spans between plus or minus buttons. This alters the AUX input audio Audio Settings nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of volume. The level value, which spans be- the bands. tween plus or minus three, is displayed • Press of the “Audio” button on the touch- above the adjustment bar. screen to activate the Audio settings screen Speed Adjusted Volume to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button Auto Play Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud- on the touchscreen to activate the Speed • Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch- ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The Radio Off With Door. justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and • You can return to the Radio screen by volume level indicator. This alters the auto- “Off.” With Auto Play on, music will begin pressing the “X” located at the top right. matic adjustment of the audio volume with to play from a connected device, immedi- variation to vehicle speed. atley after it is connected to the radio Balance/Fade • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. 305 Personalized Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the The new app shortcut, that was dragged NOTE: App screen. down onto the main menu bar, will now This feature is only available if the vehicle is 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected be an active App/shortcut. in PARK. App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. 306 Radio

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 6 — Seek Up 2 — Toggle Between Presets 7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 3 — Status Bar 8 — Seek Down 4 — Main Category Bar 9 — Browse And Manage Presets 5 — Audio Settings 10 — Radio Bands

307 Direct Tune WARNING! Android Auto • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or the wheel. You have full responsibility and tering the desired station number. assume all risks related to the use of the higher, powered smartphone with a data Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian Store Radio Presets Manually plan, that allows you to project your smart- services, and applications in this vehicle. phone and a number of its apps onto the

MULTIMEDIA Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au- Guardian services when it is safe to do so. are shown at the top of your radio screen. To tomatically brings you useful information, Failure to do so may result in an accident see the 12 preset stations per band, press the and organizes it into simple cards that appear involving serious injury or death. arrow button on the touchscreen at the top just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-class speech • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- right of the screen to toggle between the two technology, the steering wheel controls, the dio” button on the touchscreen. sets of six presets. knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, To store a radio preset manually, follow the Selecting Radio Stations and the radio display’s touchscreen to control steps below: • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or many of your apps. To use Android Auto SXM) button on the touchscreen. 1. Tune to the desired station. follow the following procedure: 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- Seek Up/Seek Down 1. Download the Android Auto app from the ton on the touchscreen for more than two Google Play store on your Android- Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on • seconds or until you hear a confirmation powered smartphone. the touchscreen for less than two seconds to beep. seek through radio stations. 2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your • Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not bypass stations without stopping. The radio downloaded, the first time you plug your will stop at the next listenable station once the device in, the app will begin to download. arrow button on the touchscreen is released. 308 NOTE: • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- Apple CarPlay Integration Be sure to use the factory-provided USB nication Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, cable that came with your phone, as after- • Hundred of compatible apps market cables may not work. the smarter, more secure way to use your NOTE: iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the area with cellular coverage. Android Auto vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice may use cellular data and your cellular cov- with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, erage is shown in the upper right corner of the Messages, and more. radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a To use CarPlay, make sure you are using connect through USB, Android Auto will also iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- connect via Bluetooth. tings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure: Android Auto 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media 3. Once the device is connected and recog- USB ports in your vehicle. nized, Android Auto should automatically NOTE: launch, but you can also launch it by Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- touching the Android Auto icon on the ning cable that came with your phone, as touchscreen, located under Apps. aftermarket cables may not work. Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can be Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: • Google Maps for navigation • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music 309 2. Once the device is connected and recog- NOTE: UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV nized, CarPlay should automatically To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is launch, but you can also launch it by turned on, and that you are in an area with WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY touching the CarPlay on the touchscreen, cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance located under Apps. erage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. WARNING! MULTIMEDIA ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident CarPlay involving serious injury or death. CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage Once CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can be CAUTION! utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: Do NOT attach any object to the touch- • Phone screen, doing so can result in damage to • Music the screen. • Messages • Maps

310 NOTE: Background Themes • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or Uconnect screen images are for illustration “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or • Screen background themes are selectable purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d ware for your vehicle. the Balance/Fade. like to set a theme, follow the instructions Setting The Time below. Equalizer • Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati- • Press the “Settings” button on the touch- • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- cally via GPS, so it should not require any screen. screen to activate the Equalizer screen. time adjustment. If you do need to set the • Press the “Display” button on the touch- • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- time manually, follow the instructions be- screen. screen, or press and drag over the level bar low for Model 4C NAV. for each of the equalizer bands. The level • For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then • Then press “Set Theme” button on the value, which spans between plus or minus press the time display at the top of the touchscreen and select a theme. nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of screen. Press “Yes.” Audio Settings the Bands. • If the time is not displayed at the top of the • Press of the “Audio” button on the touch- Speed Adjusted Volume screen, press the “Settings” button on the screen to activate the Audio settings screen • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and on the touchscreen to activate the Speed the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, Speed Adjusted Volume. Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- then check or uncheck this option. justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the • You can return to the Radio screen by • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and volume level indicator. This alters the auto- pressing the “X” located at the top right. Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. matic adjustment of the audio volume with • If these features are not available, uncheck Balance/Fade variation to vehicle speed. the Sync Time box. • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out touchscreen to Balance audio between the of the Clock Setting screen. front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.

311 Personalized Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the The new app shortcut, that was dragged NOTE: App screen. down onto the main menu bar, will now This feature is only available if the vehicle is 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected be an active App/shortcut. in PARK. App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. 312 Radio

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings 2 — Toggle Between Presets 8 — Seek Up 3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down 5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets 6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands

313 Direct Tune • With an HD radio receiver, the listener is WARNING! provided with a clear sound that enhances • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the listening experience. HD radio can also ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- transmit data such as song title or artist. the wheel. You have full responsibility and tering the desired station number. assume all risks related to the use of the Android Auto Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian Store Radio Presets Manually services, and applications in this vehicle. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect MULTIMEDIA Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They Guardian services when it is safe to do so. higher, powered smartphone with a data are shown at the top of your radio screen. To Failure to do so may result in an accident plan, that allows you to project your smart- involving serious injury or death. see the 12 preset stations per band, press the phone and a number of its apps onto the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au- • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- right of the screen to toggle between the two tomatically brings you useful information, dio” button on the touchscreen. sets of six presets. and organizes it into simple cards that appear Selecting Radio Stations To store a radio preset manually, follow the just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-class speech • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or steps below: technology, the steering wheel controls, the SXM) button on the touchscreen. 1. Tune to the desired station. knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, Seek Up/Seek Down 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- and the radio display’s touchscreen to control ton on the touchscreen for more than two many of your apps. To use Android Auto • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds seconds or until you hear a confirmation follow the following procedure: to seek through radio stations. beep. 1. Download the Android Auto app from the • Press and hold either arrow button on the HD Radio — If Equipped Google Play store on your Android- powered smartphone. touchscreen for more than two seconds to • HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C bypass stations without stopping. The radio NAV) operates similar to conventional radio will stop at the next listenable station once the except it allows broadcasters to transmit a arrow button on the touchscreen is released. high-quality digital signal. 314 2. Connect your Android powered smartphone 3. Once the device is connected, the system NOTE: to one of the media USB ports in your will display the Android Auto home To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not screen. Android Auto should automati- area with cellular coverage. Android Auto downloaded, the first time you plug your cally launch, but if it does not launch may use cellular data and your cellular cov- device in, the app will begin to download. automatically, refer to the Uconnect Own- erage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. NOTE: er’s Manual Supplement for the procedure Be sure to use the factory-provided USB to enable the feature “AutoShow.” You cable that came with your phone, as after- can also launch it by pressing Android market cables may not work. Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you use Android Auto frequently you can move the app to the menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button and locate the Android Auto app; then press and drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can be Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: Maps • Google Maps for navigation Android Auto Push and hold the VR button on the steering • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask etc. for music Google to take you to a desired destination by • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon nication in Android Auto to access Google Maps. • Hundred of compatible apps

315 NOTE: NOTE: Music If the VR button is not held, and is only If you are using the native Uconnect naviga- Android Auto allows you to access and stream pushed, the native Uconnect VR will prompt tion system, and you try and start a new route your favorite music with apps like Google Play you and any navigation command said will using the Android Auto, via voice or any other Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your launch the native Uconnect navigation system. method, a pop-up will appear asking if you smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end- would like to switch from Uconnect naviga- While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro- less music on the road.

MULTIMEDIA tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up will vides voice-guided: also appear, asking if you’d like to switch, if NOTE: • Navigation Android Auto is currently in use and you Music apps, playlists, and stations must be • Live traffic information attempt to launch a native Uconnect route. set up on your smartphone prior to using Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation Android Auto, for them to work with Android • Lane guidance type to the newly used method of navigation Auto. and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the naviga- tion type will remain unchanged. For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/. For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android or Google Maps https://support.google.com/androidauto/. Android Auto Music

316 NOTE: the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen To see the metadata for the music playing display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and through Android Auto, select the Uconnect your voice with Siri to get access to Apple System’s media screen. Music, Maps, Messages, and more. For further information refer to To use CarPlay, make sure you are using https://support.google.com/androidauto. iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- tings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the Communication very first connection only, and then use the With Android Auto connected, press and hold following procedure: the VR button on the steering wheel to acti- 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media vate voice recognition specific to the Android Android Auto Phone USB ports in your vehicle. Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages Apps NOTE: read out loud, and place and receive hands- Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- The Android Auto App will display all the free calls. ning cable that came with your phone, as compatible apps that are available to use aftermarket cables may not work. with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app down- 2. Once the device is connected, the system loaded, and you must be signed in to the app will display the CarPlay home screen. for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to Apple CarPlay should automatically g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail- launch, but if it does not launch automati- able apps for Android Auto. cally, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for the procedure to Apple CarPlay Integration enable the feature “AutoShow.” You can Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car- also launch it by pressing the CarPlay Play, the smarter, more secure way to use located in the “Apps” menu. If you use Android Auto Contact your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on Apple CarPlay frequently you can move 317 the app to the menu bar at the bottom of NOTE: NOTE: the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the and locate the CarPlay app; then press turned on, and that you are in an area with steering wheel will launch a native VR session, and drag the selected App to replace an cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- not a Siri session, and it will not function with existing shortcut in the main menu bar. erage is shown on the left side of the radio CarPlay. screen. Music MULTIMEDIA CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and more.

CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage Once CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features can be Phone utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button • Phone on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice • Music recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within CarPlay to start • Messages talking to Siri. This will allow you to make Apple Music • Maps calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone.

318 Messages NOTE: Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri • If the VR button is not held, and is only to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also pushed, the native Uconnect VR will read incoming text messages, but driver’s will prompt you and any navigation command not be able to read messages, as everything is said will launch the native Uconnect navi- done via voice. gation system. Maps • If you are using the native Uconnect navi- gation system, and you try and start a new To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your route using CarPlay, via voice or any other Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push method, a pop-up will appear asking if you Navigation Pop-Up and hold the VR button on the steering wheel would like to switch from Uconnect naviga- to use Siri to set your desired destination. tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up will Apps Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by also appear, asking if you’d like to switch, if To use a compatible app with CarPlay, you pressing Destinations and selecting a cat- an CarPlay navigation is currently in use must have the compatible app downloaded, egory, by launching Siri from the destinations and you attempt to launch a native and you must be signed in to the app. page, or even by typing in a destination. Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ the navigation type to the newly used (U.S. Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ method of navigation and a route will be ca/ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see planned for the new destination. If “No” is the latest list of available apps for CarPlay. selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.

Maps 319 UCONNECT SETTINGS • Safety & Driving • Phone/Bluetooth IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER Assistance CONTROL The Uconnect system allows you to access • Lights • SiriusXM Setup Customer Programmable feature settings • Doors & Locks • Restore Settings such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv- • Auto-On Comfort & • Clear Personal Data ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Remote Start Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off

MULTIMEDIA • Compass • System Information Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ (Uconnect 4) Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and NOTE: System Information through buttons on the Depending on the vehicles options, feature touchscreen. settings may vary. Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 4), or Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4C/4C in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ NAV) located near the bottom of the touch- en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- screen, then press the “Settings” button on dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian the touchscreen to access the Settings Residents) for further information. screen. When making a selection, scroll up or Uconnect Media Hub down until the preferred setting is high- 1 — USB Port One lighted, then press the preferred setting until 2 — Audio/AUX Jack a check-mark appears next to the setting, 3 — USB Port Two showing that setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available: There are many ways to play music from • Display • Engine Off Options MP3 players, or USB devices through your • Voice • Suspension vehicle's sound system. Press your Media • Clock • Audio button on the touchscreen to begin.

320 Audio Jack (AUX) • When connected, the compatible USB de- Bluetooth Streaming Audio vice can be controlled using the radio or • The AUX allows a device to be plugged into If using a Bluetooth equipped device you may Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound also be able to stream music to your vehicle's to the next or previous track, browse, and system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to sound system. Your connected device must list the contents. amplify the source and play through the be Bluetooth compatible and paired with your vehicle speakers. • The battery charges when plugged into the system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in- USB port (if supported by the specific de- structions). You can access the music from • Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch- vice). your connected Bluetooth device by pressing screen will change the mode to auxiliary the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen device if the audio jack is connected, allow- • To route the USB cable out of the center while in Media mode. ing the music from your device to be heard console, use the access cut out. through the vehicle's speakers. To activate NOTE: the AUX, plug in the audio jack. UCONNECT REAR SEAT When connecting your device for the first time, ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) • The functions of the device are controlled the system may take several minutes to read using the device buttons. The volume may your music, depending on the number of files. SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED be controlled using the radio or device. For example, the system will take approxi- Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is de- mately five minutes for every 1,000 songs USB Port signed to give your family years of enjoyment. loaded on the device. Also during the reading You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or • Connect your compatible device using a process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the wire- USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory be disabled. This process is needed to ensure less headphones, or plug and play a variety of sticks with audio files can also be used. the full use of your features and only happens standard video games or audio devices. Audio from the device can be played on the the first time it is connected. After the first vehicles sound system while providing time, the reading process of your device will metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) take considerably less time unless changes are information on the radio display. made or new songs are added to the playlist.

321 Getting Started • Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment sys- • With the Dual Video Screen System, Chan- tem by pushing the power button on the nel 1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and • Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: remote control. headphones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Re- cover. • When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc mote Control and Headphones refers to player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automati- Screen 2 (passenger side).

MULTIMEDIA cally, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.

RSE System Screen

• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC posi- RSE System Remote Control Channel tion. Selectors • Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu- RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1) ray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc player, the icon will be present on the Player.

322 Dual Video Screen

NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to op- erate the features of the Rear Seat Entertain- ment System. • The Remote Control • The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)

Blu-ray Disc Player

Play A Blu-ray Disc The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center console. RSE System Headphone Channel Blu-ray Disc Player Location Selectors 1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc • The system can be controlled either by the player with the label facing as indicated front seat occupants utilizing the touch- on the Blu-ray player. The radio automati- screen radio or by the rear seat occupants cally selects the appropriate mode after using the remote control. the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen, the language screen, or starts playing the first track.

323 2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for Using The Touchscreen Radio 3. RSE Mute driver's side rear passengers, ensure the Mute rear headphones for the current Remote Control and Headphone switch is ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will on Rear 1. unmute rear headphones. 3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for 4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out passenger side rear passengers, ensure Press to enable/disable remote control MULTIMEDIA the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2. functions. 5. RSE Channel 2 Mode NOTE: Indicates the current source for Screen • To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media” button on the touchscreen, 2/Channel 2. This button will be high- and then press the “Disc” button. Press the Rear Media Control Screen lighted when it is the active Screen/ “Play” button, and then the “full screen” Channel being controlled by the front 1. RSE Channel 1 Mode button. user. If this button is not highlighted, Indicates the current source for Screen select button to access controls for • Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is 1/Channel 1. This button will be high- Screen 2/Channel 2 source. not available in all states/provinces. The lighted when it is the active Screen/ vehicle must be stopped, and the gear 6. Cabin Audio Mode Channel being controlled by the front selector must be in the PARK position for Select this button to change the cabin vehicles with automatic transmission. user. If this button is not highlighted, select button to access controls for audio to the rear entertainment source Screen 1/Channel 1 source. currently shown on the rear media control screen. 2. RSE Power Press to turn RSE On/Off.

324 7. Radio Full Screen Mode Play Video Games When connecting an external source to the Select this button to change to Full AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the stan- Connect the video game console to the Audio/ dard color coding for the audio/video jacks: Screen Mode. Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the 8. RSE Mode side of each seat. 1. HDMI Input. 2. Right audio in (red). Select this button to change source for the Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the 3. Left audio in (white). on the rear media control screen. monitor to display video directly from a video 4. Video in (yellow). • Press the Media button on the touchscreen, camera, connect video games for display on and then press the rear media button on the the screen, or play music directly from an NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may touchscreen. MP3 player. exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power • Press the OK button on the touchscreen to Inverter. begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touch- screen radio. Accessibility — If Equipped Using The Remote Control Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray • Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s system that announces a function prior to side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s performing the action. For further infor- side rear screen), and then press the source mation refer to “Uconnect Settings” in key, and using the up and down arrows, “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at highlight disc from the menu and press the www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html OK button. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). • Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu and options.

Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks

325 NAVIGATION Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume • The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume system or the Navigation has been activated 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch- on your Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display screen in the lower right area of the screen. system.

MULTIMEDIA 2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid- Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in ance” button on the touchscreen. the menu bar to access the Navigation system. 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

326 Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation 1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories 5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination 2 — Find A Destination 6 — Navigation Settings 3 — View Map 7 — Emergency 4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination 8 — Information

327 Finding Points Of Interest One-Step Voice Destination Entry Setting YourHome Location • From the main Navigation menu, press the • Enter a navigation destination without tak- • Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, ing your hands off the wheel. in the menu bar to access the Navigation then press the “Points of Interest” button • Just push the Uconnect Voice Command system and the Main Navigation menu. on the touchscreen. button on the steering wheel, wait for • Press the “Home” button on the touch- • Select a category and then a subcategory, the beep and say something like, "Find screen. MULTIMEDIA if necessary. Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills • You may enter your address directly, use • Select your destination and press the MI." your current location as your home address, “GO!” button on the touchscreen. NOTE: or choose from recently found locations. Finding A Place By Spelling The Name Destination entry is not available while your • To delete your Home location (or other vehicle is in motion. However, you can also saved locations) so you can save a new • From the Main Navigation Menu press the use Voice Commands to enter an address Home location, press the “Home” button “Where to?” button on the touchscreen, while moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Rec- on the touchscreen, and in the “GO!” press the “Points of Interest” button on the ognition Quick Tips” in this section for fur- screen press the “Options” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name” ther information. touchscreen. In the Options menu press button on the touchscreen. the “Clear Home” button on the touch- • Enter the name of your destination. screen. Set a new Home location by follow- ing the previous instructions. • Press the “List” button on the touchscreen. • Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.

328 Home Your route is marked with a blue line on the TakingA Detour map. If you depart from the original route, • A Home location must be saved in the system. • To take a detour you must be navigating a your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon From the Main Navigation menu, press the route. could appear as you travel on major roadways. “Home” button on the touchscreen. • Press the “Detour” button on the touch- Adding A Stop screen. • To add a stop you must be navigating a NOTE: route. If the route you are currently taking is the only • Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen reasonable option, the device may not calcu- to return to the Main Navigation menu. late a detour. For more information, see your • Press the “Where To?” button on the touch- Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement. screen, then search for the extra stop. When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous Uconnect 4C NAV Map route, add as the first destination or add as the last destination. 1 — Distance To Next Turn 2 — Next Turn Street • Press the desired selection and press the 3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival “GO!” button on the touchscreen. 4 — Zoom In And Out 5 — Your Location On The Map 6 — Navigation Main Menu 7 — Current Street Location 8 — Navigation Routing Options

329 SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It. In addition to delivering over 130 channels of after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor- the best sports, entertainment, talk, and Avoid congestion before you reach it. By mation arrives and updates in the back- commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre- enhancing your vehicle's navigation system ground. You can access the information mium data services that work in conjunction with the ability to see detailed traffic infor- whenever you like, with no waiting. with compatible navigation systems. mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, MULTIMEDIA SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” determine average traffic speed and estimate information into your vehicle and right to your button on the touchscreen, then press the travel time along your route. Since the service fingertips. “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch- is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys- screen. tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers • Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel pick the fastest route based on traffic condi- prices in your area and route to the station NOTE: tions. of your choice. SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the trial subscription • Detailed information on traffic speed, acci- • Movie Listings — Check local movie the- dents, construction, and road closings. atres and listings in your area and route to included with your vehicle purchase. the theater of your choice. • Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services, • Sports Scores — In-game and final scores cameras and road sensors. as well as weekly schedules. • Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa- • Weather — Check variety of local and na- tion. tional weather information from radar maps • View conditions for points along your route to current and 5-day forecast. and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.

330 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

Uconnect 4 Phone Menu 1 — Favorite Contacts 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains SOS Call) 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 13 — End Call 4 — Siri 14 — Call/Redial/Hold 5 — Mute Microphone 15 — Do Not Disturb 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 16 — Reply with Text Message 7 — Conference Call* * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 8 — Phone Settings ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 9 — Text Messaging** (requires Bluetooth MAP profile) 10 — Direct Dial Pad 331 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 12 — Favorite Contacts 3 — Do Not Disturb 13 — Mute Microphone 4 — Reply with Text Message 14 — Decline Incoming Call 5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name 15 — Answer/Redial/Hold 6 — Conference Call* 16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 7 — Phone Pairing 17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 8 — Text Messaging Menu** *— Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 9 — Direct Dial Pad ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 10 — Contact Menu (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

332 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to • For Uconnect Customer Care: Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio place and receive hands-free mobile phone • U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or Uconnect 4: calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone call 1-877-855-8400. calls using their voice or by using the buttons on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec- • Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.com tion). or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-3879983 (French). The hands-free calling feature is made pos- sible through Bluetooth technology — the Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your global standard that enables different elec- Mobile Phone ToThe Uconnect System tronic devices to connect to each other wire- lessly. Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab- lishing a wireless connection between a cel- If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on lular phone and the Uconnect system. Uconnect 4 your steering wheel, you then have the NOTE: Uconnect Phone features. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. • To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first NOTE: 2. Press the “Phone” button. must determine if your mobile phone and • The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile software are compatible with the Uconnect 3. Select “Settings.” phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands- system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for 4. Select “Paired Phones.” Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. complete mobile phone compatibility infor- 5. Select “Add device.” • Most mobile phones/devices are compat- mation. ible with the Uconnect system, however • Mobile phone pairing is not available while • Uconnect Phone will display an “In some mobile phones/devices may not be the vehicle is in motion. progress” screen while the system is equipped with all of the required features to connecting. • A maximum of ten mobile phones can be utilize all of the Uconnect system features. paired to the Uconnect system.

333 Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV: Pair Your iPhone: Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure: MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV Pairing Request

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON 1. When prompted on the mobile phone, position. accept the connection request from Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device Uconnect Phone. 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen. To search for available devices on your NOTE: Bluetooth enabled iPhone: Some mobile phones will require you to 3. Select “Pairing.” 1. Press the Settings button. enter the PIN number. 4. Select “Paired Phones.” 2. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select “Add device.” • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. • Uconnect Phone will display an “In Once enabled, the mobile phone will be- progress” screen while the system is gin to search for Bluetooth connections. connecting. 3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. 334 Select The iPhone's Priority Level Pair Your Android Device: 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.” When the pairing process has successfully • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. completed, the system will prompt you to Once enabled, the mobile phone will be- choose whether or not this is your favorite gin to search for Bluetooth connections. mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this 5. Once your mobile phone finds the mobile phone the highest priority. This mo- Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. bile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and will • You may be prompted by your mobile connect to the Uconnect system automati- phone to download the phonebook, cally when entering the vehicle. Only one check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati- mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio cally download the phonebook. This is device can be connected to the Uconnect so you can make calls by saying the Uconnect Device system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply name of your contact. select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ To search for available devices on your audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Bluetooth enabled Android Device: Uconnect system will reconnect to the 1. Push the Menu button. Bluetooth device. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections.

335 Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Common Phone Commands (Examples) Level • “Call John Smith” When the pairing process has successfully • “Call John Smith mobile” completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite • “Dial 1 248 555 1212” mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this • “Redial”

MULTIMEDIA mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During mobile phones within range and will connect Call to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone • During a call, press the “Mute” button on and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be con- the Phone main screen to mute and un- nected to the Uconnect system at a time. mute the call. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth And Vehicle Pairing Request screen, and the Uconnect system will recon- nect to the Bluetooth device. • During an on-going call, press the “Trans- 1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile fer” button on the Phone main screen to phone matches the passkey shown on the You are now ready to make hands-free calls. transfer an on-going call between handset Uconnect system then accept the Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on and vehicle. Bluetooth pairing request. your steering wheel to begin. Phonebook NOTE: NOTE: Some mobile phones require the PIN to Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for ad- The Uconnect system will automatically sync be entered manually, enter the PIN num- ditional information on mobile phone pairing your phonebook from your paired phone, if and for a list of compatible phones. ber shown on the Uconnect screen. this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time that the phone is connected. If your phone 336 book entries do not appear, check the set- Changing The Volume there is a counter display to keep track of your tings on your phone. Some phones require missed calls and text messages while you • Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button you to enable this feature manually. were using Do Not Disturb. , then say a command. For example, • Your phonebook can be browsed on the "Help". Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing text message, a call or both, when declining • Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob can only be done on your phone. To browse, an incoming call and send it to voicemail. press the “Phone” button on the touch- to adjust the volume to a comfortable level screen, then the “Phonebook” button on while the Uconnect system is speaking. Automatic reply messages can be: the touchscreen. NOTE: • “I am driving right now, I will get back to Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as The volume setting for Uconnect is different you shortly.” Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are than the audio system. • Create a custom auto reply message up to shown at the top of the main phone screen. 160 characters. NOTE: Voice Command Tips To access help, push the Uconnect VR button While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second (if active) on the steering wheel and say • Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John call without being interrupted by incoming "help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater calls. system accuracy. (if active) or the VR button (if active) and say "cancel" to cancel the help NOTE: • You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” session. • Only the beginning of your custom message for example. Using Do Not Disturb will be seen on the touchscreen. • If you are listening to available voice com- • Reply with text message is not compatible mand options, you do not have to listen to With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi- with iPhones. the entire list. When you hear the command cations from incoming calls and texts, allow- ing you to keep your eyes on the road and • Auto reply with text message is only avail- that you need, push the button on the able on phones that supporting Bluetooth hands on the wheel. For your convenience, steering wheel, wait for the beep and say MAP. your command.

337 Incoming TextMessages After pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming text message and read it to you over the vehicle’s MULTIMEDIA audio system.

NOTE: Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read. To enable incoming text messaging: iPhone Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages Enable Android Device Incoming Text 1. Press the settings button on the mobile Messages phone. Android Devices 2. Select Bluetooth. 1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone. NOTE: • Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the 2. Select Settings. All incoming text messages received during mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect the current ignition cycle will be deleted from 3. Select Connections. system. the Uconnect system when the ignition is 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. turned to the OFF position. 3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect. • A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to con- 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. nect to your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press OK. 338 Helpful Tips And Common Questions To • Delete pairing history in mobile phone and UCONNECT VOICE Improve Bluetooth Performance With Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS YourUconnect System Bluetooth connection settings. • Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the Introducing Uconnect Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo- pairing: Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with bile phone. • Set mobile phone to auto-connect or these helpful quick tips. It provides the key • If your vehicle system generates a pin code trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth Voice Commands and tips you need to know the default is 0000. settings (Blackberry devices). to control your Uconnect system. Mobile Phonebook didn’t download: • Perform a factory reset on your mobile If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufac- • Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the in the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you turer or cellular provider for instructions. “phonebook download” request on your have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, mobile phone. you have a Uconnect 4C system. • Many mobile phones do not automatically Up to 5,000 contact names with four num- reconnect after being restarted (hard re- • Get Started boot). Your mobile phone can still be con- bers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook. nected manually. Close all applications that All you need to control your Uconnect system may be operating (refer to mobile phone Can’t make a conference call: with your voice are the buttons on your steer- ing wheel. manufacturer’s instructions), and follow • CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car- “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mo- riers do not support conference calling. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo- bile Phone To The Uconnect System”. Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual bile device and feature compatibility and for further information. Mobile Phone won’t pair to system: to find phone pairing instructions. Making calls while connected to AUX: • Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while removing the battery (if removable — see • passenger conversations are examples of connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands- noise that may impact recognition. your mobile phone’s owner manual). Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack. 339 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol- Uconnect Voice Recognition Button . ume while facing straight ahead. The mi- 1. Short Press: Push and release the VR but- crophone is located in the headliner and ton to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation, aimed at the driver. and other embedded functions. After you 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you hear the single beep, say a command. must first push either the VR or Phone 2. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for MULTIMEDIA button, wait until after the beep, then say a few seconds, then release the VR button your Voice Command. for Siri functions. After you hear the fa- 5. You can interrupt the help message or miliar Siri "double beep," say a command. system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone Hang Up Button, Push to end a call. Phone button and saying a Voice Com- Basic Voice Commands mand from current category. The basic Voice Commands below can be given Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons at any point while using your Uconnect system. 1 — Uconnect Phone Button Push the VR button . After the beep, 2 — Uconnect Voice Recognition Button say… 3 — Phone Hang Up Button • Cancel to stop a current voice session • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Com- Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, mands answer, or end a phone call. • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

340 Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Radio voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap- Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or pear on the top of the touchscreen. SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say… • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to Media Uconnect 4 say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The Uconnect offers connections via USB, system will provide you with a list of com- Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). mands. Voice operation is only available for con- nected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all ve- hicles.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth Uconnect 4C/4C NAV • Change source to AUX Uconnect 4 Radio 341 • Change source to USB • Redial (call previous outgoing phone num- • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest ber) Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play • Call back (call previous incoming phone genre Classical number)

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch- TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push

MULTIMEDIA screen to see all of the music on your USB the Phone button and say “Call,” then device. Your Voice Command must match pronounce the name exactly as it appears in exactly how the artist, album, song and genre your phone book. When a contact has mul- information is displayed. tiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media Smith work.” Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone- book button is illuminated on your touch- screen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com- patibility and pairing instructions. Push the Phone button . After the beep, Uconnect 4 Media say one of the following commands… Uconnect 4 Phone • Call John Smith • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

342 TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button used to adjust the interior temperature of . After the beep, say: your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to • For the 4C Uconnect System, say: “En- adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. ter state.” • For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Au- burn Hills, Michigan.” 2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR but- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone ton . After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.” Climate (4C/4C NAV)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort- able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle Navigation (4C NAV) is equipped with climate control.) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you Push the VR button . After the beep, say save time and become more productive when one of the following commands: you know exactly how to get to where you • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 4C system.) • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Navigation

343 SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — SOS Call 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps. If Equipped Theft Alarm Notification 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a Remote Door Lock/Unlock CAUTION! SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ- Send & Go who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call Vehicle Finder MULTIMEDIA will NOT work without an operable LTE web. Stolen Vehicle Assistance (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network • U.S. residents visit: connection compatible with your device. Remote Vehicle Start** www.siriusxm.com/guardian. NOTE: Remote Horn & Lights • Canadian residents visit: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca. Roadside Assistance Call authorized by the subscriber. Vehicle Health Reports** Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) An included trial and/or subscription is re- quired to take advantage of the SiriusXM Vehicle Health Alert** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email Guardian services in the next section of this report, which summarizes the performance of guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, Performance Pages Plus** your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on press the Apps button on the Uconnect **If vehicle is equipped. top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started. you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Register (4C NAV) Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health NOTE: Alerts when it detects issues with its key SiriusXM Guardian is available only on To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM systems that need your attention. For further equipped vehicles purchased within the con- Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate information go to the Owner Site website at tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and your SiriusXM Guardian services. Canada. Services can only be used where www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your (U.S. residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca coverage is available; see coverage map for in-vehicle touchscreen. details. (Canadian Residents). 344 Mobile App (4C NAV) • Press the Remote button on the navigation Push the VR button . After the beep, say bar at the bottom of the app to Lock/ one of the following commands: You’re only a few steps away from using remote Unlock, Remote Start, and activate your • Show fuel prices commands. horn and lights remotely. • Show 5 - day weather forecast • Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to bring up a • Show extended weather map to locate your vehicle or send a loca- TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with tion to your vehicle’s navigation system. Voice Command. • Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers. NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) Mobile App Need to find a gas station, view local movie SiriusXM Travel Link listings, check a sports score or the5-day To use the Uconnect App: weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a • Download the Uconnect App to your mobile suite of services that brings a wealth of infor- device. mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys- • Press the Info button on the navigation bar tem. (Not available for 4C system.) at the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info.

345 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped Android Auto — If Equipped Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice interact with Android’s best-in-class speech recognition system, and use your smartphone’s technology through your vehicle’s voice rec- data plan to project your iPhone and a number ognition system, and use your smartphone’s of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. data plan to project your Android powered MULTIMEDIA Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the smartphone and a number of its apps onto media USB ports, using the factory-provided your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory- icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display provided USB cable, and press the new main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press Android Auto icon that replaces your and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin or press and hold the “Home” button within Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recog- on the steering wheel, or press and hold the nizes natural voice commands to use a list of “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to your iPhone’s features: activate Android’s VR, which recognizes • Phone natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features: • Music • Maps • Messages • Music • Maps Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display • Phone • Additional Apps Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual • Text Messages Supplement for further information. • Additional Apps

346 General Information Additional Information The following regulatory statement applies to © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade- this vehicle: marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade- mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks Rules and with Industry Canada license- and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- Inc. ject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Uconnect System Support: Android Auto On 7-inch Display ference, and • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 2. This device must accept any interference 7 days a week) received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or NOTE: 1-800-387-9983 (French) Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- SiriusXM Guardian services support: ance could void the user’s authority to oper- • U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian ate the equipment. or call: 1-844-796-4827 • Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca or call: Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display 1-877-324-9091 Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

347 348 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .350 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . .351 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 350 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .352 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .350 In The 50 United States And In Mexico Contact ...... 350 Washington, D.C...... 352 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .350 In Canada...... 352 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...... 350 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .352 Service Contract ...... 351

349 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the manufacturer's In Mexico Contact customer center should include the following Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, The manufacturer and its authorized dealer information: are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We 1240 • Owner's name and address want you to be happy with our products and Sante Fe C.P. 05109 services. • Owner's telephone number Mexico, D. F. Warranty service must be done by an autho- (home and office) rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you • Authorized dealer name In Mexico City: 5081-7568 take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 know your vehicle the best, and are most • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) concerned that you get prompt and high • Vehicle delivery date and mileage Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands quality service. The manufacturer's autho- Customer Service Chrysler International rized dealer have the facilities, factory- FCA US LLC Customer Center Services LLC CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE trained technicians, special tools, and the P.O. Box 21–8004 latest information to ensure the vehicle is P.O. Box 191857 fixed correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 San Juan 00919-1857 This is why you should always talk to an Phone: (877) 426-5337 authorized dealer service manager first. Most Tel.: (787) 782-5757 matters can be resolved with this process. FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Fax: (787) 782-3345 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, P.O. Box 1621 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or talk to the general manager or owner of the Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) authorized dealer. They want to know if you Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 need assistance. Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / To assist customers who have hearing diffi- • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve (800) 387-9983 French culties, the manufacturer has installed spe- the concern, you may contact the manufac- cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the turer's customer center. Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who 350 has access to a TDD or a conventional tele- Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca- typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng- WARNING! communicate with the manufacturer by dial- lish / (800) 387-9983 French). Engine exhaust (internal combustion en- ing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any gines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or Canadian residents with hearing difficulties service contract that is not the manufactur- emit, chemicals known to the State of that require assistance can use the special er's service contract. It is not responsible for California to cause cancer and birth de- needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. any service contract other than the manufac- fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for turer's service contract. If you purchased a tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con- service contract that is not a manufacturer's and certain products of component wear nect with a Bell Relay Service operator. service contract, and you require service after contain, or emit, chemicals known to the the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War- State of California to cause cancer and Service Contract ranty expires, please refer to the contract birth defects, or other reproductive harm. You may have purchased a service contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. for a vehicle to help protect you from the high WARRANTY INFORMATION cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac- We appreciate that you have made a major turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. investment when you purchased the vehicle. See the Warranty Information Booklet for the The manufacturer stands behind only the An authorized dealer has also made a major terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran- manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur- investment in facilities, tools, and training to ties applicable to this vehicle and market. chased a manufacturer's service contract, assure that you are absolutely delighted with you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner the ownership experience. You will be Identification Card in the mail within three pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any warranty issues or related concerns. any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National

351 REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call the PUBLICATION ORDER DEFECTS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at FORMS 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); In The 50 United States And Washington, • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or D.C. to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Warranty Booklet. United States customers If you believe that your vehicle has a Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at defect that could cause a crash or Washington, D.C. 20590. You can www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of also obtain other information about the page and select the “Contact Us” link, cause injury or death, you should im- then select the “Owner’s Manual and mediately inform the National High- motor vehicle safety from http:// Glove Compartment Material” from the way Traffic Safety Administration www.safercar.gov. left menu. You can also purchase a copy by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA In Canada CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE US LLC. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). If you believe that your vehicle has a • Replacement User Guide kits or, if you pre- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, safety defect, you should contact fer, additional printed copies of the it may open an investigation, and if it the Customer Service Department im- Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting finds that a safety defect exists in a mediately. Canadian customers who group of vehicles, it may order a recall www.techauthority.com or by calling wish to report a safety defect to the 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 and remedy campaign. However, Canadian government should con- (Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express NHTSA cannot become involved in tact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle and Discover orders are accepted. individual problems between you, your Defect Investigations and Recalls authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

352 NOTE: • The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec- tronic files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites. • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.

353 354 INDEX

Accessories...... 286 Air Conditioning Filter...... 52, 243 Auto Up Power Windows...... 54 Mopar ...... 286 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 51 Axle Fluid...... 285 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Conditioning Refrigerant...... 243 Axle Lubrication ...... 282, 283 Off ...... 170, 172 Air Conditioning System ...... 51, 243 On...... 170, 172 Air Pressure, Tires...... 259 Back-Up ...... 180 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Alarm Back-Up Camera ...... 180 (Cruise Control)...... 169 Arm The System ...... 23 Battery ...... 74, 242 Adding Fuel ...... 180, 183 Disarm The System ...... 23 Charging System Light ...... 74 Additives, Fuel...... 277 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 23, 76 Belts, Seat ...... 138 AirBag...... 117 Alarm System (Security Alarm)...... 23 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 97 Air Bag Operation ...... 118 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 279 B-Pillar Location ...... 256 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 116 Capacities ...... 280 Brake Assist System ...... 87 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 119 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 86 Brake Control System, Electronic .....87 Enhanced Accident Response . .123, 223 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 76 Brake Fluid ...... 249, 282, 283, 285 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 223 Arming System (Security Alarm) ...... 23 Brake System ...... 249 Front Air Bag ...... 117 Assist, Hill Start...... 88 Fluid Check ...... 249, 282, 283 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 122 Audio Jack ...... 320 Master Cylinder ...... 249 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 119 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 54 Warning Light ...... 73 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .123 Automatic Door Locks ...... 27 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 150 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .117 Automatic High Beams ...... 39 Bulb Replacement ...... 200 Side Air Bags ...... 119 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . .51 Bulbs, Light ...... 140 Transporting Pets ...... 137 Automatic Transmission ...... 151 Air Bag Light...... 73, 116, 138 Adding Fluid ...... 282, 283 Camera ...... 180 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 123 Fluid Level Check ...... 250 Capacities, Antifreeze Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 243 Fluid Type ...... 282, 283, 285 (Engine Coolant) ...... 280 355 Capacities, Fluid ...... 279, 280 Cleaning Door Ajar ...... 74, 75 Caps, Filler Wheels ...... 266 Door Ajar Light ...... 74, 75 Fuel ...... 218 Climate Control ...... 43 Door Locks, Automatic ...... 27

INDEX Oil (Engine) ...... 236 Manual ...... 43 DVD Player (Video Entertainment Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 138 Compact Spare Tire ...... 264 System) ...... 321 Chains, Tire ...... 267, 268 Computer, Trip/Travel...... 73 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 250 Contract, Service ...... 351 Economy (Fuel) Mode ...... 150 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 252 Cooling System ...... 248 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 87 Check Engine Light Coolant Capacity ...... 279, 280 Anti-Lock Brake System ...... 86 (Malfunction Indicator Light) ...... 83 Inspection ...... 249 Electronic Roll Mitigation ...... 92 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .137 Selection Of Coolant Traction Control System ...... 89 Checks, Safety...... 137 (Antifreeze) .....279, 281, 283, 284 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Child Restraint...... 125 Cruise Light...... 80, 82 Control) ...... 167 Child Restraints Booster Seats ...... 127 Customer Assistance ...... 350 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....89 Child Restraints ...... 125 Customer Programmable Features . . . .320 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Child Seat Installation ...... 135 Light ...... 74 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Daytime Running Lights ...... 39 Emergency, In Case Of Belt ...... 133 Dealer Service ...... 242 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .....220 Infants And Child Restraints .....126 Defroster, Windshield...... 139 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 200 LATCH Positions ...... 129 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 82 Jacking ...... 250 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Diesel Fuel ...... 277 Jump Starting ...... 215 Children ...... 129 Diesel Fuel Requirements ...... 277 Tow Hooks ...... 223 Older Children And Child Restraints .127 Bulk Storage Of ...... 185 Emission Control System Maintenance . .83 Seating Positions ...... 128 Dipsticks Engine ...... 236, 238, 239, 240 Child Safety Locks ...... 28 Oil (Engine) ...... 241 Checking Oil Level ...... 241 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 221 Compartment . .236, 237, 238, 239, 240 Disturb ...... 337 Compartment Identification . . .236, 237 356 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .281, 283, 284 Fluid Level Checks Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...... 62 Cooling ...... 248 Brake ...... 249 Gasoline (Fuel)...... 276 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 138 Fluids And Lubricants . . . .281, 283, 284 Glass Cleaning ...... 271 Fuel Requirements ...... 276 Forward Collision Warning ...... 99 Identification ...... 240 Four-Way Hazard Flasher...... 200 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ...... 331 Jump Starting ...... 215 Four Wheel Drive ...... 153, 162 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 200 Oil ...... 279, 281, 283, 284 Operation ...... 153 Headlights Oil Filler Cap ...... 236 Systems ...... 153 Passing ...... 39 Oil Selection ...... 279 Four Wheel Drive Operation ...... 153 Head Restraints ...... 31 Overheating ...... 218 Heated Mirrors...... 37 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 220 Starting ...... 143 Hill Descent Control ...... 94 Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . .176 Enhanced Accident Response Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 94 Front ParkSense System ...... 176 Feature ...... 123, 223 Hill Start Assist ...... 88 Fuel ...... 276, 277 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 138 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...... 62 Exhaust System ...... 138 Adding ...... 180, 183 Hood Release ...... 58 Exterior Lights ...... 140 Additives ...... 277 Diesel ...... 277, 284 Instrument Cluster ...... 81 Filters Economy Mode ...... 150 Instrument Cluster ...... 71 Air Conditioning ...... 52, 243 Gasoline ...... 276 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning.....271 Engine Oil ...... 281, 283, 284 Light ...... 77 Interior Appearance Care...... 270 Flashers ...... 200 Materials Added ...... 277 Introduction ...... 1 Hazard Warning ...... 200 Octane Rating ...... 276, 281, 283 Inverter Outlet (115V) ...... 68 Turn Signal ...... 81, 140, 202 Requirements ...... 276, 277 Inverter, Power...... 68 Fluid, Brake ...... 282, 283, 285 Specifications ...... 278, 281, 283 iPod/USB/MP3 Control Fluid Capacities ...... 279, 280 Tank Capacity ...... 279, 280 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 331 Fluid Leaks ...... 140 Fueling ...... 180, 183 Fuses ...... 204

357 Jacking Instructions ...... 211 Lights ...... 140 Loading Vehicle Jack Location ...... 210 AirBag...... 73, 116, 138 Tires ...... 256 Jack Operation ...... 211, 250 Brake Assist Warning ...... 92 Locks

INDEX Jump Starting ...... 215 Brake Warning ...... 73 Automatic Door ...... 27 Bulb Replacement ...... 200 Child Protection ...... 28 Key Fob Cruise ...... 80, 82 Lug Nuts ...... 275 Arm The Alarm ...... 23 Daytime Running ...... 39 Disarm The Alarm ...... 23 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 38 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 242 Programming Additional Engine Temperature Warning .....75 Maintenance Schedule . . . .226, 228, 232 Key Fobs ...... 16, 22 Exterior ...... 140 Malfunction Indicator Light Key Fob Programming Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 200 (Check Engine) ...... 77, 83 (Remote Keyless Entry)...... 16 Hill Descent Control Indicator .....94 Manual Park Release ...... 218 Key-In Reminder ...... 18 Low Fuel ...... 77 Manual, Service ...... 352 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 24 Malfunction Indicator Key, Replacement ...... 16, 22 (Check Engine) ...... 77 Manual Transmission Keys ...... 15 Park ...... 80, 81 Lubricant Selection ...... 285 Passing ...... 39 Marker Lights, Side ...... 202 Lane Change Assist...... 41 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 75 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...... 28 LaneSense ...... 179 Security Alarm ...... 76 Memory Seat...... 28 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 108 Service ...... 200 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 28 Latches ...... 140 Side Marker ...... 202 Mini-Trip Computer ...... 73 Lead Free Gasoline ...... 276 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .78 Mirrors ...... 36 Leaks, Fluid ...... 140 Traction Control ...... 92 Exterior Folding ...... 36 Life Of Tires ...... 262 Turn Signal ...... 38, 81, 140, 202 Heated ...... 37 Liftgate ...... 59, 60 Warning (Instrument Cluster Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 101 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...... 42 Description) ...... 75, 81 Mopar ...... 286 Light Bulbs...... 140 Mopar Accessories ...... 286

358 Multi-Function Control Lever ...... 38 Passing Light ...... 39 Radial Ply Tires ...... 260 Personalized Menu Bar ...... 306, 312 Radio Navigation ...... 326, 328, 329, 330 Pets ...... 137 Presets ...... 307, 313 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ...... 331 Radio Frequency Occupant Restraints ...... 106 Phone (Pairing) ...... 333 General Information ...... 17, 21, 22 Octane Rating, Gasoline Phone (Uconnect) ...... 331 Radio Screens...... 304, 310 (Fuel)...... 276, 281, 283 Pinch Protection ...... 57 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 42 Oil, Engine ...... 281, 283, 284 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . .256 Rear Camera ...... 180 Capacity ...... 279, 280 Power Rear Cross Path ...... 97 Checking ...... 241 Distribution Center (Fuses) ...... 205 Rear ParkSense System . . .174, 176, 180 Dipstick ...... 241 Glass Sunroof ...... 56 Rear Wiper/Washer ...... 42 Filter ...... 281, 283, 284 Inverter ...... 68 Recreational Towing...... 194 Pressure Warning Light ...... 75 Lift Gate ...... 60 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 107 Recommendation ...... 279 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .65 Remote Control Viscosity ...... 279 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . .35 Starting System ...... 19 Oil Pressure Light ...... 75 Windows ...... 54 Remote Keyless Entry Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 82 Power Shade Arm The Alarm ...... 23 Operating Precautions ...... 82 Open ...... 58 Disarm The Alarm ...... 23 Outlet Power Steering Fluid ...... 285 Programming Additional Power ...... 65 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .....112 Key Fobs ...... 16, 22 Overheating, Engine ...... 218 Preparation For Jacking ...... 210 Remote Starting Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .352 Pretensioners Exit Remote Start Mode ...... 20 Seat Belts ...... 112 Remote Starting System ...... 19 Paddle Shifters ...... 151 Replacement Bulbs ...... 200 ParkSense Active Park Assist ...... 177 Quadra-Lift ...... 157 Replacement Keys...... 16, 22 ParkSense System, Front And Rear . . .176 Quadra-Trac ...... 153 Replacement Tires ...... 262 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 174, 176 Reporting Safety Defects...... 352 359 Restraint, Head ...... 31 Seat Belts ...... 107, 138 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 16, 22 Restraints, Child ...... 125 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 110 Service Assistance ...... 350 Roll Over Warning ...... 2 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Service Contract ...... 351

INDEX Rotation, Tires ...... 268 Anchorage ...... 110 Service Manuals ...... 352 Child Restraint ...... 125 Shifting ...... 148 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 138 Extender ...... 111 Automatic Transmission . . . .148, 151 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 140 Front Seat ...... 107, 108, 109 Shoulder Belts ...... 108 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 352 Inspection ...... 138 Signals, Turn ...... 81, 140, 202 Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 138 Operating Instructions ...... 109 Sirius Satellite Radio Safety Information, Tire ...... 250 Pregnant Women ...... 112 Traffic & Weather ...... 330 Safety Tips ...... 137 Pretensioners ...... 112 Sirius Travel Link ...... 330 Schedule, Maintenance . . .226, 228, 232 Rear Seat ...... 108 SiriusXM Guardian ...... 296 SD Card Port ...... 320 Reminder ...... 75 Account ...... 296 Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure ...... 110 In Vehicle Features ...... 298 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seats ...... 28, 29, 30 Maintaining Your Account ...... 298 Belt Anchorage ...... 110 Heated ...... 29, 30 Registration ...... 297 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .112 Memory ...... 28 Remote Features ...... 301 Energy Management Feature .....112 Vented ...... 30 Renewing Subscriptions ...... 298 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....109 Ventilated ...... 30 Send&Go...... 303 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 108 Security Alarm ...... 23, 76 Vehicle Finder ...... 303 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....110 Arm The System ...... 23 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 344 Pregnant Women ...... 112 Disarm The System ...... 23 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....267, 268 Seat Belt Extender ...... 111 Selec-Terrain ...... 162 Snow Tires ...... 263 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 112 Selection Of Coolant Sound Systems Seat Belt Reminder ...... 107 (Antifreeze) ...... 281, 283, 284 (Radio) ...... 320, 326, 328, 329 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 270 Sentry Key Spare Tire...... 210, 264, 265 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 107 Key Programming ...... 22 Spark Plugs ...... 281, 283 360 Specifications Opening ...... 56 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .101 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 281, 283 Venting ...... 56 Pressure Warning Light ...... 78 Oil ...... 281, 283 Sun Roof ...... 56 Quality Grading ...... 269 Speed Control Supplemental Restraint System - Radial ...... 260 Accel/Decel ...... 168, 169 AirBag...... 117 Replacement ...... 215, 262 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 170 Sway Control, Trailer ...... 93 Rotation ...... 268 Cancel ...... 169 System, Remote Starting ...... 19 Safety ...... 250, 259 Distance Setting (ACC Only) .....172 Sizes ...... 252 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ...... 173 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 35 Snow Tires ...... 263 Resume ...... 169 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .51 Spare Tire ...... 210, 264, 265 Set ...... 168 Text Messaging...... 338 Spinning ...... 261 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 167 Tilt Steering Column ...... 35 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 261 Starting ...... 19, 143, 144 Tire And Loading Information Placard . .256 Wheel Mounting ...... 215 Automatic Transmission . . . .143, 145 Tire Markings...... 251 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 275 Remote ...... 19 Tires...... 140, 259, 264, 269 Tire Safety Information ...... 250 Starting And Operating ...... 143 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 262 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 223 Starting Procedures ...... 143, 144 Air Pressure ...... 259 Towing ...... 188, 221 Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . .144 Chains ...... 267, 268 Disabled Vehicle ...... 221 Steering...... 35 Changing ...... 215, 250 Guide ...... 188, 189, 190 Tilt Column ...... 35 Compact Spare ...... 264 Recreational ...... 194 Wheel, Heated ...... 36 Flat Changing ...... 215 Weight ...... 188, 189, 190 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 General Information ...... 259, 264 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .194 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System High Speed ...... 260 Traction Control ...... 89 Controls ...... 295 Inflation Pressures ...... 259 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)...... 93 Storage, Vehicle ...... 52 Jacking ...... 250 Trailer Towing ...... 188 Sunroof Life Of Tires ...... 262 Trailer Towing Guide .....188, 189, 190 Closing ...... 56 Load Capacity ...... 256 Trailer Weight...... 188, 189, 190 361 Transfer Case Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .274 Warranty Information ...... 351 Fluid ...... 285 Vehicle Loading ...... 256 Washers, Windshield ...... 41, 241 Transmission ...... 151 Vehicle Security Alarm Wheel And Wheel Trim ...... 266

INDEX Automatic ...... 151, 250 (Security Alarm) ...... 23 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care...... 266 Fluid ...... 285 Vehicle Storage ...... 52 Wind Buffeting ...... 55, 56 Maintenance ...... 250 Vehicle User Guide Window Fogging...... 52 Shifting ...... 148 ICON Symbol Glossary ...... 13 Windows Transporting Pets ...... 137 In Vehicle Help ...... 13 Close ...... 54 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 261 IVH...... 13 Down ...... 54 Turn Signals...... 81, 202 Navigation ...... 13 Open ...... 54 Operating Instructions ...... 13 Power ...... 54 Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display .....304 Searching User Guide ...... 13 Up...... 54 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) Ventilated...... 29 Windshield Defroster ...... 139 Making A Phone Call ...... 331, 337 Receiving A Call ...... 331 Voice Command ...... 336 Windshield Washers ...... 41, 241 Uconnect Phone ...... 331, 336, 338 Voice Recognition System Fluid ...... 241 Uconnect Voice Command .....336, 339 (VR)...... 336, 337, 339 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 245 Uniform Tire Quality Grades...... 269 Windshield Wipers ...... 41 Unleaded Gasoline ...... 276 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 200 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 245 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....110 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 42 USB Port ...... 320 Description)...... 76 Warning, Roll Over ...... 2

362 363 364 365 366 367 368 This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

2844814_18a_Grand_Cherokee_UG_ENG_051017.indd 2 5/10/17 2:36 PM Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow

the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. User Guide First Edition GRAND CHEROKEE 18WK-926-AA DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. 2018 GRAND CHEROKEE USER GUIDE Includes SRT®

2844814_18a_Grand_Cherokee_UG_ENG_051017.indd 1 5/10/17 2:36 PM